You are on page 1of 244

Backhoe Loader

310J and 310SJ


Engines 4045DT060,
4045HT054 and 4045TT094
*OMT210365*

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
310J and 310SJ Backhoe Loaders
Engines 4045DT060, 4045HT054
and 4045TT094
OMT210365 ISSUE B3 (ENGLISH)

CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents


are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

If this product contains a gasoline engine:

WARNING

The engine exhaust from this product contains


chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

The State of California requires the above two warnings.


Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.

Worldwide Construction
And Forestry Division
LITHO IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so explained on the warranty certificate or statement which
could result in personal injury or equipment damage. you should have received from your dealer.
This manual and safety signs on your machine may also
be available in other languages. (See your John Deere This warranty provides you the assurance that John
dealer to order.) Deere will back its products where defects appear within
the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent also provides field improvements, often without charge
part of your machine and should remain with the machine to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty.
when you sell it. Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change
its performance beyond the original factory specifications,
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both the warranty will become void and field improvements
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch or otherwise overpowering machines will result in such
fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench. action.
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by THE TIRE MANUFACTURER'S warranty supplied with
facing in the direction of forward travel. your machine may not apply outside the U.S.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.) If you are not the original owner of this machine, it is in
in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all your interest to contact your local John Deere dealer to
the numbers to help in tracing the machine should it be inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John
stolen. Your dealer also needs these numbers when you Deere notify you of any issues or product improvements.
order parts. File the identification numbers in a secure
place off the machine.
WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support
program for customers who operate and maintain their
DX,IFC7 -19-03APR09-1/1

IMPORTANT Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions


Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures regulations applicable to this engine and may result in
resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine. substantial fines and penalties.
VD76477,000104D -19-27JUN12-1/1

020113

PN=2
Introduction

Emissions Control Warranty Statement—U.S. and Canada

TX1053039 —19—19MAR10

VD76477,000104E -19-04JAN10-1/1

020113

PN=3
Introduction

Technical Information Feedback Form


We need your help to continually improve our technical
publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your
comments, ideas and improvements.
SEND TO: John Deere Dubuque Works
18600 South John Deere Road
Attn: Publications, Dept. 324
Dubuque, IA 52004-0538
USA

FAX NUMBER: 1-563-589-5800 (USA)

Publication Number:

Page Number:

Ideas, Comments:

Name:

Phone:

Email Address:

THANK YOU!
TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/1

020113

PN=4
Contents
Page Page

Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences


Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1 Safety—Safety Signs
Safety Signs ......................................................1-5-1
Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped) ..1-5-3
Safety—General Precautions Replace Safety Signs ........................................1-5-4
Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1
Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-1
Operate Only If Qualified ...................................1-2-1 Operation—Operator’s Station
Wear Protective Equipment...............................1-2-2 Pedals and Levers.............................................2-1-1
Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications.......1-2-2 Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With
Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-2 Pilot Controls.................................................2-1-1
Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-2 Fire Extinguisher Location .................................2-1-1
Avoid High-Pressure Oils ..................................1-2-3 Standard Display Monitor (SDM).......................2-1-2
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ...............................1-2-3 Standard Display Functions...............................2-1-3
Work In Ventilated Area.....................................1-2-4 Anti-Theft Security System Configuration..........2-1-4
Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-4 Anti-Theft Security System Operation ...............2-1-6
Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-5 Standard Display Monitor
Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-5 (SDM)—Normal Display................................2-1-7
Dispose of Waste Properly ................................1-2-5 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-6 Monitor Messages.........................................2-1-8
Clean Debris from Machine ...............................1-2-6 Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu ....2-1-8
Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main
Menu—Codes ...............................................2-1-9
Safety—Operating Precautions Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly .................1-3-1 Menu—Monitor............................................2-1-10
Start Only From Operator's Seat .......................1-3-1 Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main
Use and Maintain Seat Belt ...............................1-3-1 Menu—Job Timer........................................2-1-11
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement ..........1-3-1 Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main
Prevent Unintended Machine Menu—Settings...........................................2-1-11
Movement—If Equipped With Pilot Right-Side Console Functions .........................2-1-12
Controls.........................................................1-3-2 Controls—Steering Console ............................2-1-14
Avoid Work Site Hazards...................................1-3-2 Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If
Keep Riders Off Machine ..................................1-3-3 Equipped .....................................................2-1-15
Avoid Backover Accidents .................................1-3-3 Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped.................2-1-15
Avoid Machine Tipover ......................................1-3-3 Engine Speed Control Knob ............................2-1-16
Add and Operate Attachments Safely ...............1-3-4 Horn Button .....................................................2-1-16
Use Special Care When Operating ...................1-3-4 Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner
Operating or Traveling On Public Roads...........1-3-4 Controls—If Equipped .................................2-1-17
Inspect and Maintain ROPS ..............................1-3-5 Side Windows—Secondary Exits ....................2-1-18
Rear Windows .................................................2-1-18
Safety—Maintenance Precautions Adjusting Seat .................................................2-1-19
Park and Prepare for Service Safely .................1-4-1 Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped ..........2-1-20
Service Cooling System Safely .........................1-4-1 12-Volt Accessory Outlets ...............................2-1-21
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-2
Make Welding Repairs Safely ...........................1-4-2 Operation—Operating The Machine
Drive Metal Pins Safely .....................................1-4-2 Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting ..............2-2-1
Service Tires Safely...........................................1-4-3 Check Instruments Before Starting....................2-2-2
Engine Break-In Period .....................................2-2-3

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this


manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2013
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2012

i 020113

PN=1
Contents

Page Page

Starting the Engine ............................................2-2-3 Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III
Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start A Engines......................................................3-1-9
Aid—If Equipped ...........................................2-2-4 Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service
Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped ..................2-2-5 Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine ............3-1-10
Warm-Up ...........................................................2-2-5 Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical
Cold Weather Warm-Up ....................................2-2-6 Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil ...................3-1-11
Ride Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-6 Hydraulic Oil ....................................................3-1-11
Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-7 Grease.............................................................3-1-12
Driving the Machine...........................................2-2-7 Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant .................3-1-12
Cruise Control....................................................2-2-9 Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant........3-1-13
Operating Stabilizers .........................................2-2-9 John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant
Operating Boom Lock......................................2-2-10 Extender......................................................3-1-13
Operating Swing Lock .....................................2-2-11 Supplemental Coolant Additives......................3-1-14
Operating Swing Lock Pin ...............................2-2-11 Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-14
Operating Backhoe—John Deere Additional Information About Diesel
Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-12 Engine Coolants and John Deere
Operating Backhoe—Excavator COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender ...........3-1-15
Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-13 Testing Diesel Engine Coolant.........................3-1-16
Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot
Controls.......................................................2-2-14 Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot Service Machine at Specified Intervals..............3-2-1
Controls.......................................................2-2-15 Check Hour Meter Regularly .............................3-2-1
Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-1
Equipped .....................................................2-2-16 Engine Identification ..........................................3-2-2
Operating Extendible Dipperstick With Loader Boom Service Lock ...............................3-2-5
Attachments ................................................2-2-17 Opening and Closing Engine Hood ...................3-2-5
Operating Extendible Dipperstick Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-5
Lock—If Equipped.......................................2-2-17 Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic 3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-6
Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped.......2-2-18 Service Intervals ................................................3-2-7
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Required Parts...................................................3-2-9
Functions—If Equipped...............................2-2-19
Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped.......2-2-20
Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped ......2-2-21 Maintenance—As Required
Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped .........2-2-22 Check Tire Pressure..........................................3-3-1
Operating Loader.............................................2-2-23 Tire Inflation Pressures......................................3-3-2
Operating Differential Lock ..............................2-2-24 Check Wheel Fasteners ....................................3-3-4
Operating Mechanical Front Wheel Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped....................3-3-4
Drive (MFWD)—If Equipped .......................2-2-24 Drain Water and Sediment from Water
Lifting ...............................................................2-2-25 Separator ......................................................3-3-6
Parking the Machine........................................2-2-25 Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel
Loading Machine on a Trailer ..........................2-2-26 Filter—If Equipped ........................................3-3-6
Towing .............................................................2-2-27 Clean or Replace Air Cleaner
Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-3-7
Clean or Replace Air Cleaner
Maintenance—Machine Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-3-8
Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1 Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-1 Equipped .......................................................3-3-8
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2 Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel
Biodiesel Fuel ....................................................3-1-3 Bearings—If Equipped ..................................3-3-9
Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-4 Check Coolant .................................................3-3-10
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather
on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-5
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-6 Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil.............................3-1-6 Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level .................3-4-1
Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-2
Engines .........................................................3-1-7 Check Coolant Level .........................................3-4-3
Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls..................3-4-4
Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ..................3-1-8 Grease Loader Pivots........................................3-4-5

Continued on next page

ii 020113

PN=2
Contents

Page Page

Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If Replace Cab Air Filters......................................3-9-4


Equipped .......................................................3-4-6 Inspect Belt........................................................3-9-5
Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins .......3-4-6 Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter ...............................3-9-6
Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd Replace Fuel Breather.......................................3-9-6
Cylinders and Pivots .....................................3-4-7 Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter ....3-9-7
Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots....3-4-8 Check Coolant ...................................................3-9-8
Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots .....3-4-8
Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped .....3-4-9 Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Grease Non-Powered Front Axle Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance) ............3-10-1
Steering Pivots—If Equipped ........................3-4-9 Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil ......................3-10-1
Grease MFWD Front Axle and Change MFWD Planetary Housing
Universal Joints—If Equipped .......................3-4-9 Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2
Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical Change MFWD Front Axle Housing
Jack—If Equipped .......................................3-4-10 Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2
Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin ............................3-4-10 Change Rear Axle and Planetary
Housing Oil..................................................3-10-3
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir
Check Transmission Oil Level ...........................3-5-1 Fill Screen ...................................................3-10-4
Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If
Equipped .......................................................3-5-1 Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours
Draining the Cooling System—Tier
Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours 3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-1
Change Engine Break-In Oil and Draining the Cooling System—Tier
Replace Filter ................................................3-6-1 2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-2
Filling the Cooling System—Tier
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours 3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-3
Check MFWD Planetary Housing Filling the Cooling System—Tier
Oil—If Equipped ............................................3-7-1 2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-4
Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped .......3-7-1
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals ..3-7-2 Miscellaneous—Machine
Check Rear Axle Oil Level.................................3-7-4 External Service Brake Inspection.....................4-1-1
Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-7-4 Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock ............4-1-2
Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours Secondary and Primary Element ..................4-1-3
Check Air Intake Hose.......................................3-8-1 Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped .................4-1-3
Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque .....3-8-1 Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator .............4-1-4
Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment................3-8-2 Do Not Service or Adjust Injection
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..............3-8-3 Nozzles or Injection Pump ............................4-1-5
Replace Primary and Final Fuel Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-5
Filters—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine...................3-8-4 Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-6
Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ......3-8-5 Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System .........4-1-6
Replace Auxiliary Water Separator Handling, Checking and Servicing
Fuel Filter—If Equipped ................................3-8-5 Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-7
Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-8
Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine........................3-8-6 Removing Batteries ...........................................4-1-9
Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine ....................3-8-6 (MMS)—If Equipped......................................4-1-9
Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-8-6 Replacing Fuses................................................4-1-9
Remove and Install Halogen Bulb ...................4-1-13
Checking Starting System ...............................4-1-14
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped ..........4-1-14
Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered Changing Loader Buckets ...............................4-1-15
Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped..............3-9-1 Adding Front Counterweights ..........................4-1-16
Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather ..............3-9-2 Reversing Stabilizer Feet ................................4-1-16
Replace Engine Air Cleaner Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires.................4-1-17
Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-9-3 Welding On Machine .......................................4-1-17
Replace Engine Air Cleaner Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If
Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-9-4 Equipped .....................................................4-1-18

Continued on next page

iii 020113

PN=3
Contents

Page Page

Discharge Ride Control System 310J Backhoe Loader Lifting


Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19 Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ................4-6-8
Discharge Pilot Control System 310J Backhoe Loader Lifting
Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19 Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
Lowering Boom Without Electrical (Retracted) ....................................................4-6-8
Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls ..4-1-20 310J Backhoe Loader Lifting
Check Park Brake............................................4-1-20 Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
Bleeding Fuel System......................................4-1-21 (Extended).....................................................4-6-9
Brake Bleeding Procedure...............................4-1-22 310SJ Dimensions...........................................4-6-10
Service Recommendations For 310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight .......................4-6-14
Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings ..............4-1-24 310SJ Buckets.................................................4-6-15
Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If 310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting
Equipped .....................................................4-1-25 Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ..............4-6-15
Toe-In Check and Adjust .................................4-1-26 310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting
Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket.................4-1-27 Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
Do Not Service Control Valves, (Retracted) ..................................................4-6-16
Cylinders, Pumps or Motors........................4-1-27 310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting
Keep ROPS Installed Properly ........................4-1-28 Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
Hardware Torque Specifications......................4-1-28 (Extended)...................................................4-6-16
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-29
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-30
Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock.................4-1-30

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout Procedure ......................4-2-1

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1
Engine ...............................................................4-3-2
Electrical System ...............................................4-3-5
Steering System ................................................4-3-9
Hydraulic System.............................................4-3-10
Transmission ...................................................4-3-12
MFWD .............................................................4-3-12
Rear Axle.........................................................4-3-13
Air Conditioning ...............................................4-3-14

Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1
Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-1

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identification Number (PIN) .....4-5-1
Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1
Record Transmission Serial Number.................4-5-1
Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number ........4-5-2
Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial
Number—If Equipped....................................4-5-2
Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-2
Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-3

Miscellaneous—Specifications
Travel Speeds ...................................................4-6-1
Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities .....4-6-1
310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions....................4-6-2
310J Backhoe Loader Specifications ................4-6-6
310J Backhoe Loader Weight ...........................4-6-7
310J Buckets .....................................................4-6-7

iv 020113

PN=4
Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences
Safety and Operator Convenience Features

2 3
1
17 5

16
6

13
4
15
12 7 8
14 10 9

T145296 —UN—05SEP01
11

T145296

Please remember, the operator is the key to preventing 9. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter
accidents. solenoid helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.
10. Ground-Level Fueling, Daily Service Checks.
1. Headlights/Taillights. Two front halogen driving/work Ground-level fueling feature eliminates the need to
lights and two rear halogen work lights. climb on the machine to fuel it.
2. Signal/Warning Lights. Roof mounted turning signal 11. Steps. Wide, skid-resistant steps provide excellent
lights and warning lights for on-road use. footing for getting in/out of operator's station.
3. ROPS Protection. Certified rollover protection 12. Independent Parking/Secondary Brake.
structure surrounds the operator. Integral roof Independent, electrically controlled, parking brake
provides overhead protection. electrically engages when the engine is stopped.
4. Seat Position Sensor. An audio/visual warning alerts 13. Neutral Start. The machine will not move until the
operator when transmission control lever (TCL) is Transmission Control Lever (TCL) is cycled back to
in forward/reverse and the seat turned toward the neutral and the park brake is released, regardless of
backhoe position. TCL position at startup.
5. Interior Rearview Mirror. Offers the operator a view 14. Backup Alarm. Alerts bystanders when the machine
of activity behind him. is shifted into reverse.
6. Handholds. Large and conveniently placed 15. Seat Belt Retractors. Seat belt retractors help keep
handholds, make it easy to enter or exit the operator's belts clean and convenient to use.
station. 16. Exceptional Visibility. Views to either side and front
7. Loader Boom Service Lock. Provided for working on or rear working tools are unrestricted.
or around this machine with the boom raised. 17. Operator Manual Holder. A sealed manual holder
8. Engine Fan Guard. A secondary engine fan guard keeps manual clean and dry.
inside engine compartment encloses rotating fan
blades.
VD76477,000126F -19-14JUL09-1/1

1-1-1 020113

PN=9
Safety—General Precautions
Recognize Safety Information
This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this

T133555 —UN—28AUG00
symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert
for the potential of personal injury.
Follow the precautions and safe operating practices
highlighted by this symbol.
A signal word — DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION —
is used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies
the most serious hazards.
On your machine, DANGER signs are red in color,
WARNING signs are orange, and CAUTION signs are

T133588 —19—28AUG00
yellow. DANGER and WARNING signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are on CAUTION
labels.

TX03679,00016CC -19-05FEB10-1/1

Follow Safety Instructions


Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are

TS201 —UN—23AUG88
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1

Operate Only If Qualified


Do not operate this machine unless the operator's manual machine functions with the machine in an open area
has been read carefully, and you have been qualified by before starting to work.
supervised training and instruction.
Know and observe all safety rules that may apply to every
Operator should be familiar with the job site and work situation and work site.
surroundings before operating. Try all controls and
TX03679,00016FA -19-03JAN07-1/1

1-2-1 020113

PN=10
Safety—General Precautions

Wear Protective Equipment


Guard against injury from flying pieces or metal or debris;
wear goggles or safety glasses.
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.

TS206 —UN—23AUG88
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment
or loss of hearing. Wear suitable hearing protection such
as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises. Radio or music headphones
are not suitable to use for hearing protection.
OUT4001,0000570 -19-12FEB10-1/1

Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications


John Deere recommends using only genuine John Deere reliability, and may create a hazard for the operator or
replacement parts to ensure machine performance. others near the machine. The installer of any modification
Never substitute genuine John Deere parts with alternate which may affect the electronic controls of this machine is
parts not intended for the application as these can responsible for establishing that the modification does not
create hazardous situations or hazardous performance. adversely affect the machine or its performance.
Non-John Deere parts, or any damage or failures resulting
from their use are not covered by any John Deere warranty. Always contact an authorized dealer before making
machine modifications that change the intended use,
Modifications of this machine, or addition of unapproved weight or balance of the machine, or that alter machine
products or attachments, may affect machine stability or controls, performance or reliability.
AM40430,00000A9 -19-20AUG09-1/1

Inspect Machine
Inspect machine carefully each day by walking around it
before starting.
Keep all guards and shields in good condition and properly
installed. Fix damage and replace worn or broken parts

T6607AQ —UN—18OCT88
immediately. Pay special attention to hydraulic hoses and
electrical wiring.

TX03679,0001734 -19-08JAN08-1/1

Stay Clear of Moving Parts


T133592 —UN—12SEP01

Entanglements in moving parts can cause serious injury.


Stop engine before examining, adjusting or maintaining
any part of machine with moving parts.
Keep guards and shields in place. Replace any guard
or shield that has been removed for access as soon as
service or repair is complete.
TX03679,00016D2 -19-08JAN08-1/1

1-2-2 020113

PN=11
Safety—General Precautions

Avoid High-Pressure Oils


This machine uses a high-pressure hydraulic system.
Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Never search for leaks with your hands. Protect hands.

T133509 —UN—17MAR06
Use a piece of cardboard to find location of escaping oil.
Stop engine and relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines or working on hydraulic system.
If hydraulic oil penetrates your skin, see a doctor
immediately. Injected oil must be removed surgically
within hours or gangrene may result. Contact a
knowledgeable medical source or the Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

T133840 —UN—20SEP00
TX03679,00016D3 -19-03NOV08-1/1

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids


Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once
per year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion,
blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other signs
of wear or damage.

X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately
with John Deere approved replacement parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands medical source. Such information is available in
and body from high-pressure fluids. English from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid 309-748-5636.
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1

1-2-3 020113

PN=12
Safety—General Precautions

Work In Ventilated Area


Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If
it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area.

DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1

Prevent Fires

T133552 —UN—14SEP00
Handle Fuel Safely: Store flammable fluids away from
fire hazards. Never refuel machine while smoking or when
near sparks or flame.
Clean Machine Regularly: Keep trash, debris, grease
and oil from accumulating in engine compartment, around
fuel lines, hydraulic lines, exhaust components and
electrical wiring. Never store oily rags or flammable
T133553 —UN—07SEP00
materials inside a machine compartment.
Maintain Hoses and Wiring: Replace hydraulic hoses
immediately if they begin to leak, and clean up any oil
spills. Examine electrical wiring and connectors frequently
for damage.
Keep A Fire Extinguisher Available: Always keep a
multi-purpose fire extinguisher on or near the machine.
Know how to use extinguisher properly. T133554 —UN—07SEP00

TX03679,00016F5 -19-26JUN09-1/1

1-2-4 020113

PN=13
Safety—General Precautions

Prevent Battery Explosions


Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).

DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1

Handle Chemical Products Safely


Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause
serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with
John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants,
coolants, paints, and adhesives.

TS1132 —UN—26NOV90
A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific
details on chemical products: physical and health hazards,
safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.
Check the MSDS before you start any job using a
hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what
the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow
procedures and recommended equipment.
(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical
products used with John Deere equipment.)
DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93-1/1

Dispose of Waste Properly


Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

TS1133 —UN—26NOV90
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can
damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1

1-2-5 020113

PN=14
Safety—General Precautions

Prepare for Emergencies


Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.

TS291 —UN—23AUG88
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1

Clean Debris from Machine


Keep engine compartment, radiator, batteries, hydraulic
lines, exhaust components, fuel tank, and operator's
station clean and free of debris.
Clean any oil spills or fuel spills on machine surfaces.

T6669AG —UN—18OCT88
Temperature in engine compartment may go up
immediately after engine is stopped. BE ON GUARD
FOR FIRES DURING THIS PERIOD.
Open access door(s) to cool the engine faster, and clean
engine compartment.

OUT4001,00000E3 -19-20AUG09-1/1

1-2-6 020113

PN=15
Safety—Operating Precautions
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly
Prevent falls by facing the machine when you get on and

T133468 —UN—30AUG00
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps and handrails.
Never use machine controls as handholds.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.

TX03679,00016F2 -19-12FEB07-1/1

Start Only From Operator's Seat

T133715 —UN—07SEP00
Avoid unexpected machine movement. Start engine only
while sitting in operator's seat. Ensure all controls and
working tools are in proper position for a parked machine.
Never attempt to start engine from the ground. Do not
attempt to start engine by shorting across the starter
solenoid terminals.

TX03679,0001799 -19-22APR10-1/1

Use and Maintain Seat Belt


Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to

T133716 —19—14SEP00
fasten seat belt when loading and unloading from trucks
and during other uses.
Examine seat belt frequently. Be sure webbing is not
cut or torn. Replace seat belt immediately if any part is
damaged or does not function properly.
The complete seat belt assembly should be replaced
every three years, regardless of appearance.
TX03679,00016DD -19-19MAR07-1/1

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement


1
Always set the park lock brake switch to the ON
position (1) before leaving the operator's seat for any
reason. TX1014609 —UN—19DEC06

Be careful not to accidentally actuate steering, travel


or other controls. Engage park brake and lower work
equipment to the ground during work interruptions. P
Stop the engine before allowing anyone to approach
the machine. Follow proper parking procedures before
leaving the operator's station.

1— ON Position

VD76477,0001204 -19-02FEB07-1/1

1-3-1 020113

PN=16
Safety—Operating Precautions

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement—If


Equipped With Pilot Controls
Be careful not to accidentally actuate control levers
when co-workers are present. Always lock hydraulics on
backhoe during work interruptions. Lock hydraulics before

TX1014474 —UN—12DEC06
allowing anyone to approach machine.

Pilot Enable Switch

VD76477,0001200 -19-05SEP12-1/1

Avoid Work Site Hazards


Avoid contact with gas lines, buried cables and water
lines. Call utility line location services to identify all
underground utilities before starting work.
Prepare work site properly. Avoid operating near

T147554 —UN—01NOV01
structures or objects that could fall onto the machine. Clear
away debris that could move unexpectedly if run over.
Avoid boom or attachment contact with overhead
obstacles or overhead electrical lines. Never move any
part of machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice
the line insulator length to overhead wires.
Keep bystanders clear at all times. Keep bystanders
away from raised booms, attachments, and unsupported
loads. Avoid swinging or raising booms, attachments, or
loads over or near personnel. Use barricades or a signal
person to keep vehicles and pedestrians away. Use a
signal person if moving machine in congested areas or

T147555 —UN—13DEC01
where visibility is restricted. Always keep signal person in
view. Coordinate hand signals before starting machine.
Operate only on solid footing with strength sufficient
to support machine. Be especially alert working near
embankments or excavations.
Avoid working under over-hanging embankments or
stockpiles that could collapse on machine.
Reduce machine speed when operating with tool on or hitting obstacles (rocks, uneven concrete or manholes)
near ground when obstacles may be hidden (e.g., during can cause a sudden stop. Always wear your seat belt.
snow removal or clearing mud, dirt, etc.). At high speeds
VD76477,000001C -19-16NOV11-1/1

1-3-2 020113

PN=17
Safety—Operating Precautions

Keep Riders Off Machine


Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.
Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being
struck by foreign objects and being thrown off of the
machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view resulting

T148715 —UN—06DEC01
in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner.

TX03768,0000BAF -19-27MAR09-1/1

Avoid Backover Accidents


Before moving machine, be sure all persons are
clear of the machine travel path. Turn around and look

T145317 —UN—06SEP01
directly for best visibility. Use mirror to assist in checking
behind the machine. Keep windows and mirror clean and
in good repair.
Be certain backup warning alarm is working properly.
Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed
or when in close quarters. Keep signal person in view at
all times. Use prearranged hand signals to communicate.
TX03768,0000B8B -19-20DEC06-1/1

Avoid Machine Tipover


Use seat belt at all times.
Do not jump if the machine tips. You will be unlikely to
jump clear and the machine may crush you.
Load and unload from trucks or trailers carefully. Be
sure truck is wide enough and secured on a firm level
surface. Use loading ramps and attach them properly to
truck bed.
Be careful on slopes. Use extra care on soft, rocky or
frozen ground because machine may slip sideways in
these conditions.
Ensure solid footing. Use extra care when operating on
stockpile materials, or near banks or excavations that may
cave-in and cause machine to tip or fall.
T147495 —19—26OCT01

TX03768,0000BA3 -19-07SEP06-1/1

1-3-3 020113

PN=18
Safety—Operating Precautions

Add and Operate Attachments Safely is required or recommended. Verify that all connections
are secure and attachment responds properly to controls.
Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting
your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments Carefully read attachment manual and follow all
may affect machine stability or reliability and may create a instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders
hazard for others near the machine. and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its
characteristics and range of motion.
Ensure that a qualified person is involved in attachment
installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection
TX03679,00016F0 -19-12FEB07-1/1

Use Special Care When Operating


Never use the loader to lift people. Do not allow anyone
to ride in the bucket or use the bucket as a work platform.
Operate carefully with raised loads. Raising the load
reduces machine stability, especially on side slopes on

T148749 —UN—05DEC01
soft terrain. Drive and turn slowly with a raised load.
Ensure that objects in the bucket are secure. Do not
attempt to lift or carry objects that are too big or too long to
fit inside the bucket unless secured with an adequate chain
or other device. Keep bystanders away from raised loads.
Be careful when lifting objects. Never attempt to lift
objects too heavy for your machine. Assure machine
stability and hydraulic capability with a test lift before
attempting other maneuvers. Use an adequate chain or
sling and proper rigging techniques to attach and stabilize
loads.
Never lift an object above or near another person.

T147438 —UN—26OCT01
TX03768,0000B70 -19-27MAR09-1/1

Operating or Traveling On Public Roads


Machines that work near vehicle traffic or travel slower
than normal highway speeds must have proper lighting

T141891 —UN—22MAY01
and markings to assure they are visible to other drivers.
Install additional lights, beacons, slow moving vehicle
(SMV) emblems, or other devices and use as required to
make the machine visible and identify it as a work machine.
Check state and local regulations to assure compliance.
Keep these devices clean and in working condition.

TX03679,00017C8 -19-02MAR07-1/1

1-3-4 020113

PN=19
Safety—Operating Precautions

Inspect and Maintain ROPS


A damaged roll-over protective structure (ROPS) should To maintain the ROPS:
be replaced, not reused.
The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS
• Replace missing hardware using correct grade
hardware.
is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an
overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
• Check hardware torque.
bending, drilling, or cutting.
• Check isolation mounts for damage, looseness or wear;
replace them if necessary.
If ROPS was loosened or removed for any reason, inspect • Check ROPS for cracks or physical damage.
it carefully before operating the machine again.
TX03679,000179F -19-07SEP06-1/1

1-3-5 020113

PN=20
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Park and Prepare for Service Safely
Warn others of service work. Always park and prepare
your machine for service or repair properly.
• Park machine on a level surface and lower equipment
to the ground.

T133332 —19—14DEC01
• Engage park brake.
• Stop engine and remove key.
• Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an obvious place in
the operator's station.
Securely support machine or attachment before working
under it.
• Do not support machine with any hydraulically actuated
tools or attachments.
• Do not support machine with cinder blocks or wooden
pieces that may crumble or crush.
• Do not support machine with a single jack or other
devices that may slip out of place.
• Always install boom lock before working on or around

TS229 —UN—23AUG88
this machine with the loader boom raised.
Understand service procedures before beginning repairs.
Keep service area clean and dry. Use two people
whenever the engine must be running for service work.

TX03679,0001809 -19-02MAR07-1/1

Service Cooling System Safely


Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
Do not service radiator through the radiator cap. Only fill
through the surge tank filler cap. Shut off engine. Only

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
remove surge tank filler cap when cool enough to touch
with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.

VD76477,0001157 -19-20DEC06-1/1

1-4-1 020113

PN=21
Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating


Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:

TS220 —UN—23AUG88
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
before welding or heating. fumes and dust away.

Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
will take place.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1

Make Welding Repairs Safely


IMPORTANT: Disable electrical power before

T133547 —UN—31AUG00
welding. Turn off main battery switch
or disconnect positive battery cable.
Separate harness connectors to engine and
vehicle microprocessors.

Avoid welding or heating near pressurized fluid lines.


Flammable spray may result and cause severe burns if
pressurized lines fail as a result of heating. Do not let heat
go beyond work area to nearby pressurized lines.
Make sure there is good ventilation. Wear eye protection
Remove paint properly. Do not inhale paint dust or fumes. and protective equipment when welding.
Use a qualified welding technician for structural repairs.
TX03679,00016D5 -19-24SEP07-1/1

Drive Metal Pins Safely

T133738 —UN—14SEP00
Always wear protective goggles or safety glasses and
other protective equipment before striking hardened
parts. Hammering hardened metal parts such as pins and
bucket teeth may dislodge chips at high velocity.
Use a soft hammer or a brass bar between hammer and
object to prevent chipping.

TX03679,0001745 -19-07SEP06-1/1

1-4-2 020113

PN=22
Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Service Tires Safely


Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause
serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper
equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.

TS211 —UN—23AUG88
DX,RIM -19-24AUG90-1/1

1-4-3 020113

PN=23
Safety—Safety Signs
Safety Signs

TX1016262 —19—14DEC06

Continued on next page VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-1/2

1-5-1 020113

PN=24
Safety—Safety Signs

TX1016263 —19—14DEC06

VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-2/2

1-5-2 020113

PN=25
Safety—Safety Signs

Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped)

TX1024865 —19—10JUL07

Safety Signs—If Equipped with Backhoe Coupler


VD76477,000152B -19-26JUN07-1/1

1-5-3 020113

PN=26
Safety—Safety Signs

Replace Safety Signs


Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this
operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not

TS201 —UN—23AUG88
reproduced in this operator's manual.

DX,SIGNS -19-18AUG09-1/1

1-5-4 020113

PN=27
Operation—Operator’s Station
Pedals and Levers
1— Backhoe Control Lever 3— Backhoe Auxiliary
2— Boom Lock Lever Hydraulic Function Foot
Pedal

T163833B —UN—13JAN03
HG31779,00001C3 -19-31OCT06-1/1

Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With Pilot


Controls
1— Backhoe Pilot Controls 3— Backhoe Auxiliary
2— Boom Lock Lever Hydraulic Function Foot
Pedal

T163834B —UN—13JAN03
HG31779,00001C4 -19-31OCT06-1/1

Fire Extinguisher Location


NOTE: Be familiar with the operation of the fire
extinguisher. Inspect the fire extinguisher and
service the fire extinguisher regularly

The designated location for mounting the fire extinguisher


is inside the cab and to the right of the steering console.

1— Fire Extinguisher
TX1043059A —UN—29MAY08

Fire Extinguisher Location

MB60223,0000057 -19-22APR09-1/1

2-1-1 020113

PN=28
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Monitor (SDM)

2 3 4
1

7
17 16 15 5 6
8

TX1002567 —UN—30JAN06
14 13 12 11 10 9
TX1002567

1— STOP Indicator 7— Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction 11— Not Used This Application 16— Engine Air Filter Restriction
2— Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator 12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Indicator
Gauge 8— Diagnostic Code Indicator 13— Not Used This Application 17— Engine Oil Pressure
3— Converter Oil Temperature 9— Joystick Enable Indicator 14— MFWD Indicator Indicator
Gauge 10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature 15— Engine Alternator Voltage
4— Fuel Level Gauge Indicator Indicator
5— Display Window
6— Park Brake Indicator

• MENU provides initial entry into machine settings, • NEXT will move to the next selection within a menu or
diagnostics and monitor functions. Once a main menu mode. Press NEXT to cycle through all the possible
has been selected, pressing MENU again will return to selections in a menu.
the Normal Display Mode Menu. • SELECT toggles between displays during normal
• BACK will back out of a menu, one item each time the operation. During menu modes, SELECT will activate
key is pressed. The BACK key will eventually return to the currently chosen menu, provide additional
the normal display. information on codes, make selection and reset timers.
VD76477,00011A9 -19-07MAR07-1/1

2-1-2 020113

PN=29
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Functions


1—Stop Indicator: IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator
IMPORTANT: If STOP indicator lights and alarm lights and hydraulic oil is warm, change filter
sounds for more than 10 seconds with engine oil as soon as possible to prevent damage.
pressure indicator lit, stop machine immediately
and investigate cause of problem. NOTE: On the 310SJ model, the hydraulic oil filter
restriction warning is disabled (will NOT activate)
If STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds for for temperatures 38° C (100° F) and below.
more than 10 seconds with engine coolant
temperature gauge needle in red zone, reduce Indicator will light when hydraulic oil filter element is
load and run engine for 1—2 minutes at slow restricted.
idle to allow time to cool. If STOP indicator
remains lit and engine coolant temperature NOTE: Cold oil can cause indicator to light temporarily.
gauge needle does not fall to an acceptable Allow time for oil to warm up and indicator to
operating temperature, stop engine and go out before servicing filter.
investigate problem. Do not restart engine
until problem has been corrected. 8—Diagnostic Code Indicator: Indicator will light when a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is activated; text message
The STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds when: and code appears in display window. It may not be
necessary to stop the engine immediately, but the cause
• Engine oil pressure is low. should be investigated as soon as possible. Press MENU,
• Engine coolant temperature is excessively high. BACK, NEXT or SELECT to acknowledge message and
• Transmission control lever (TCL) is shifted into “forward” turn indicator off.
F or “reverse” R with park brake ON.
• TCL is shifted into “forward” F or “reverse” R with 9—Joystick Enabled Indicator: Joystick Enable
park brake OFF and seat rotated toward the backhoe Indicator will light when joysticks are enabled. Light will
position. go OFF whenever joysticks become disabled.

2—Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge: When engine 10—Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator: Indicator will
coolant temperature is too high the gauge needle will light when hydraulic oil temperature is high. Reduce load
enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm will immediately. Actuate backhoe bucket unload function.
sound. Do not stop engine. Reduce load and run engine 11—Not used this application.
at slow idle for 1—2 minutes. If gauge needle does not
fall to an acceptable operating level, stop engine. See 12—Fasten Seat Belt Indicator: Indicator will light for
your authorized dealer. the first 5 seconds after the engine is started to warn the
operator to fasten seat belt.
3—Torque Converter Oil Temperature Gauge: When
torque converter oil temperature is too high, gauge needle 13—Not used this application.
will enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm
will sound. Reduce load immediately, shift into NEUTRAL 14—MFWD Indicator: Indicator will light when
and run engine at slow idle. Inspect for plugged oil cooler. mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) is engaged.

4—Fuel Level Gauge: Gauge shows fuel level in tank. 15—Engine Alternator Voltage Indicator: Indicator will
Fuel level gauge needle will enter red zone when fuel light when alternator output voltage drops below 12V.
level is low. Check electrical system or recharge battery, if necessary.

5—Display Window: Display window has six active 16—Engine Air Filter Restriction Indicator: When air
displays; two constant and four selectable. filter elements are restricted, indicator will light. Clean
or change filter elements.
• FNR (Constant) 17—Engine Oil Pressure Indicator:
• Tachometer (Constant)
• Hour Meter (Selectable) IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage. If
• Hydraulic Oil Temperature (Selectable) engine oil pressure indicator light comes
• Battery Voltage (Selectable) on while operating, stop machine. STOP
• Job Timer (Selectable) ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
Press NEXT to scroll through listing, to view desired data.
When engine oil pressure is low, indicator will light, STOP
6—Park Brake Indicator: Indicator will light when park indicator will flash and alarm will sound. Stop machine.
brake is engaged. STOP ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
7—Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Indicator:
VD76477,00011AA -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-1-3 020113

PN=30
Operation—Operator’s Station

Anti-Theft Security System Configuration


IMPORTANT: The default Owner security code for
the anti-theft security system is 111 for 3-digit 8. Press the SELECT button to select the displayed
security systems, and 00111 for 5-digit security locking method.
systems. The default Operator security codes 9. The selected locking method displays for 2 seconds
are 000, 999, and 998 for 3-digit security before the SDM returns to the normal display mode
systems, and 00000, 00999, and 00998 for menu.
5-digit security systems.
Changing an Operator or Owner Security Code
When providing Operator security codes to
machine users, owners should not provide IMPORTANT: If all three available Operator security
operators with the default codes. Instead, codes will not be used, make sure the unused
owners should first change the default Operator codes are changed to something other then their
security codes to other values before providing default values. Leaving access to the machine
codes to machine users. Refer to Changing by means of default codes is not recommended.
an Operator or Owner Security Code in this
section for more information. The following rules apply when changing security codes:

Once the anti-theft security system has been enabled, • An Operator security code can only be changed if that
either as a factory installed option or field installation, the security code or the Owner security code is used during
system needs to be configured. Select the locking method the change procedure.
and change the Owner and Operator security codes, as • The Owner security code can be used to reset all codes
necessary. back to their defaults by accessing the RESET ALL
menu option.
Selecting the Locking Method • The anti-theft security system resets all Operator
security codes and the Owner security code to the
Complete the following procedure to select the locking default values when the Master security code is used to
method for the anti-theft security system. Only someone enable the system.
with the Owner security code can configure the locking • The Owner security code can only be changed by
method. There are four locking options available within someone using the Owner security code. The Owner
the anti-theft security system: security code must be entered before changing that
code.
• Prompt for Lock
• Auto Lock—5 Minutes 1. Press the MENU button on the standard display
• Auto Lock—60 Minutes monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU.
• Anti-theft off (machine is not locked)
2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT
1. Press the MENU button on the standard display displays.
monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU.
3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET
2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT CODES.
displays.
4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT
3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET OWNER.
CODES.
5. If changing an Operator security code, press the NEXT
4. Press the NEXT button to display ANTITHEFT button to display the appropriate Operator security
CONFIG. code to change. If changing the Owner security code,
5. Press the SELECT button to display OWNER CODE proceed to next step.
0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0 0 0 6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows CURRENT
(5-digit system). CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or CURRENT CODE 0
6. Enter the current Owner security code. The current 0 0 0 0 (5-digit system).
locking method displays. 7. Enter the Owner security code or current Operator
7. Press the NEXT button to display the appropriate security code for the code to be changed.
locking method. a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to
change the number displayed in the active (flashing)
• ANTITHEFT OFF field. The NEXT button increments the current digit;
• PROMPT FOR LOCK the BACK button decrements the current digit.
• AUTOLOCK 5 MINUTES
• AUTOLOCK 60 MINUTES
Continued on next page MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-1/2

2-1-4 020113

PN=31
Operation—Operator’s Station

b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number “111”, “000”, “999”, and “998”, respectively, for 3-digit
displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the security systems, and “00111”, “00000”, “00999”, and
active field to the next digit to the right. “00998” for 5-digit security systems.

NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last 9. The default codes display before the SDM returns to
digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system the normal display mode menu.
configuration) processes the entered security NOTE: If owner code is not available, security codes
code. If the code is incorrect, an error message can be reset using the Master security code.
appears on the monitor display. See your authorized dealer.
The anti-theft security system allows three
attempts to enter a valid security code before Changing System Security Code Length
requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and Use this procedure to select the length of security code
ON to restart the process. to use with the anti-theft security system, either 3-digit or
5-digit. The system default is 3-digit.
8. Enter the new security code.
1. Press the MENU button on the standard display
9. The new security code displays for 3 seconds before monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU.
the SDM returns to the normal display mode menu.
2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT
Resetting Operator and Owner Security Codes displays.
1. Press the MENU button on the standard display 3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET
monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU. CODES.
2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT 4. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
displays. displays.
3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET 5. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER
CODES. CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0
0 0 (5-digit system).
4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT
OWNER. 6. Enter the current Owner security code.
5. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT RESET ALL a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to
displays. change the number displayed in the active (flashing)
field. The NEXT button increments the current digit;
6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER
the BACK button decrements the current digit.
CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0
0 0 (5-digit system). b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number
displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the
7. Enter the current Owner security code.
active field to the next digit to the right.
a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to
NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last
change the number displayed in the active (flashing)
digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system
field. The NEXT button increments the current digit;
configuration) processes the entered security
the BACK button decrements the current digit.
code. If the code is incorrect, an error message
b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number appears on the monitor display.
displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the
The anti-theft security system allows three
active field to the next digit to the right.
attempts to enter a valid security code before
NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and
digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system ON to restart the process.
configuration) processes the entered security
code. If the code is incorrect, an error message 7. The current Antitheft System will be displayed, either
appears on the monitor display. ANTITHEFT 3-DIGIT or ANTITHEFT 5-DIGIT. To
change the selection, press the NEXT button to cycle
The anti-theft security system allows three between the different systems and then press the
attempts to enter a valid security code before SELECT button to activate. At this point, all codes will
requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and be set to anti-theft system defaults, but the system
ON to restart the process. locking method will remain unchanged.
8. The anti-theft security system resets the Owner and
three Operator security codes to their defaults of
MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-2/2

2-1-5 020113

PN=32
Operation—Operator’s Station

Anti-Theft Security System Operation


IMPORTANT: When providing Operator security codes
to machine users, owners should not provide 1. Turn key switch to OFF.
operators with the default codes. Instead, 2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 60 minutes.
owners should first change the default Operator After 60 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security
security codes to other values before providing code, depending on system configuration, is required
codes to machine users. See Anti-Theft Security for machine operation.
System Configuration in this section.
Unlocking the Machine (Operator and Owner)
NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started
but will shut down after 3 seconds. 1. Sit in the operator's seat to power up the engagement
and monitor unit.
Locking the Machine (Operator and Owner) 2. Turn key switch to ON position.
There are three different locking methods available with 3. The standard display monitor (SDM) displays ENTER
the anti-theft security system. See Anti-Theft Security CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or ENTER CODE 0 0 0
System Configuration for more information on selecting a 0 0 (5-digit system).
locking method.
4. Enter the appropriate security code:
• Prompt for Lock
• Auto Lock—5 Minutes a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to
• Auto Lock—60 Minutes change the number displayed in the active (flashing)
field. The NEXT button increments the current digit;
NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started the BACK button decrements the current digit.
but will shut down after 3 seconds.
b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number
Prompt for Lock displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the
active field to the next digit to the right.
1. Turn key switch to OFF.
NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last
2. The monitor display shows HIT SELECT TO LOCK. digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system
NOTE: If you do not press SELECT to lock the machine configuration) processes the entered security code.
within 20 seconds of turning key switch OFF, the
SDM will NOT lock the machine. 5. Once a security code is entered, the monitor displays
UNLOCKING ANTITHEFT while the SDM attempts to
3. Press the SELECT button within 20 seconds to lock unlock the machine.
the machine. 6. The SDM display shows ANTITHEFT UNLOCKED
Auto Lock—5 Minutes if the security code was correct and the machine is
unlocked.
1. Turn key switch to OFF.
The display shows FAILED TO UNLOCK if the security
2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 5 minutes. code was incorrect.
After 5 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security code,
depending on system configuration, is required for NOTE: The anti-theft security system allows three
machine operation. attempts to enter a valid security code before
requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and
Auto Lock—60 Minutes ON to restart the process.
MD04263,00003A8 -19-22APR09-1/1

2-1-6 020113

PN=33
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Monitor (SDM)—Normal Display


When key switch is turned to the ON/RUN position: (SDM) will show ?F for any forward gear, ?R for any
reverse gear, or ?N when in neutral. This will allow the
• Indicator Lights: All indicator lights come on for 5 operator to move the machine for diagnostics or repair.
seconds. If the engine is cold, the oil pressure indicator
and STOP indicator will remain lit, after the others go Tachometer shows engine speed in revolutions-per-minute
out. Park brake indicator will also stay on. (rpm).
• Gauges: Backlights come on and gauge needles cycle,
Press NEXT button repeatedly, to scroll through the
before settling to actual readings.
selectable displays.
• Monitor Display Window: All LCD segments light,
followed by the machine model number and then the Hour meter, Battery Voltage, Hydraulic Oil Temperature,
last screen displayed at engine shut down. and Job Timer are operator selectable displays.
Display window has six active displays, two constant and Hour Meter shows total machine hours, to the nearest
four selectable. tenth of an hour, and accumulates time only when the
Transmission indicator(s) and the tachometer are constant engine is running.
displays. Hydraulic Oil Temperature is displayed in either degrees
NOTE: Transmission indicator shows the actual gear Fahrenheit or Celsius depending on the units selected.
the transmission is in, not the position of the For further information, see Standard Display Monitor
transmission control lever (TCL). (SDM)—Main Menu—Monitor in this section.
Battery Voltage is displayed to the nearest tenth of a volt.
Transmission indicator shows the travel position of the
transmission control lever (TCL), F—forward, N—neutral, Job Timer can be set to record time for a specific job or
R—reverse and the speed range (1, 2, 3, or 4) selected operator. For further information, see Standard Display
by the operator. Monitor (SDM)—Main Menu—Job Timer in this section.
When a transmission fault code is present and the TCL
has been placed in gear, the Standard Display Monitor
MD04263,00000BD -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-1-7 020113

PN=34
Operation—Operator’s Station

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Monitor displays on the SDM until the fault either is resolved or the
Messages operator presses any button on the SDM.

The standard display monitor (SDM) automatically The DTCs that automatically generate a SDM message
displays a message for certain diagnostic trouble codes include:
(DTCs). When the DTC is initially active, a message
Monitor Text Description
CONVERTER OIL TEMP Torque Converter Oil Temperature High
CONVERTER OIL TEMP Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage High
CONVERTER OIL TEMP Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage Low
DIFF LOCK SW FAULT Differential Lock Switch Stuck
ECU CONFIG MISMATCH Security Violation
ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage High
ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage Low
ENGINE AIR FILTER Engine Air Filter Restricted
ENGINE OVER TEMP Engine Coolant Temperature Extremely High
FUEL TEMP CONTROL Internal ECU Failure
HI SYSTEM VOLTAGE System Voltage High
HYD OIL FILTER Hydraulic Oil Filter Restricted
HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value) Hydraulic Oil Temperature High
HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value) Hydraulic Oil Temperature Moderately High
LOW ENGINE OIL PRES Engine Oil Pressure Extremely Low
LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE System Voltage Low
NO CLUTCH DISCONNECT Clutch Disconnect Device Fault
NO CLUTCH DISCONNECT Clutch Disconnect Switch Stuck Closed
NO CLUTCH DISCONNECT Switch Short to Ground
TURN SEAT TO REAR Seat Position Front Switch (S17) Short Circuit to Power or Stuck Closed

VD76477,0001544 -19-01FEB08-1/1

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu


The Main Menu provides the capability to select the next
submenus. The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the
MAIN MENU
MENU button. The submenus under Main Menu include:
1. Codes: View active or stored diagnostic trouble codes CODES

TX1015152 —19—22JAN07
(DTC).
2. Monitor: Change display units and language.
3. Job Timer: Set-up or reset job timer.
MONITOR
4. Settings: Operator selectable preferences.
JOB TIMER
JH91824,00009AE -19-10FEB10-1/1

2-1-8 020113

PN=35
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main


Menu—Codes
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
Codes will be highlighted. Press the SELECT button to
CODES
ACTIVE

TX1015154 —19—22JAN07
display the Codes submenu.
The submenus under Codes include:
• Active
• Stored
STORED
Press NEXT to toggle between ACTIVE and STORED
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).
Press SELECT to view details of either code type.
VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-1/3

TX1003365 —UN—03FEB06
If no codes have been received (ACTIVE) or recorded
(STORED), NO ACTIVE or NO STORED CODES will
appear on display. If codes have been received or
recorded, the most recent code will appear first, numbered
1/X, along with the controller ID and the DTC.
In the example shown, 1 of 2 codes is displayed. The
code was reported by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) and
it is number 105.15.
DTC Example

VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-2/3

Press NEXT to scroll through codes or press SELECT


to view code details; a text message will give a brief
description of what occurred to trigger the code. Stored
codes also include hour meter readings of the first and
FUEL GAUGE
last occurrence of the DTC.
SENSOR

TX1003367 —19—22JAN07
NOTE: The DTC is stored every time the engine is
started with an active code. Total number of
occurrences may reflect the number of times the
engine was restarted, rather than the number of
OUT OF
times the DTC actually occurred. Stored codes
should only be cleared by a trained service
technician. See your authorized dealer.
RANGE HIGH
Text Message
TX1003369 —UN—03FEB06

Hour Meter Readings

VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-3/3

2-1-9 020113

PN=36
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main


Menu—Monitor
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Monitor option and
MONITOR
UNITS

TX1015155 —19—22JAN07
press SELECT to view the Monitor submenu.
The submenus under Monitor include:
• Units
• Language
LANGUAGE
Press SELECT to view display options.
• UNITS: Press NEXT to toggle between ENGLISH and
METRIC. Press SELECT to display readings in either
English or Metric units.
ENGLISH

TX1003377 —19—22JAN07
• LANGUAGE: Press NEXT to scroll through available
languages (English, Spanish or French). Press
SELECT to change display text to desired language. METRIC
SELECTED will appear when settings are changed,
then display returns to MONITOR menu. SELECTED
Units

ENGLISH
S PA N I S H

TX1003379 —19—22JAN07
FRENCH
SELECTED
Languages

VD76477,00011EC -19-31OCT06-1/1

2-1-10 020113

PN=37
Operation—Operator’s Station

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main


Menu—Job Timer
Job timer is a resettable hour meter that can be used to
time specific tasks to the nearest tenth of an hour. Job
JOB TIMER
timer accumulates hours whenever the engine is running,
UNHIDE

TX1015156 —19—22JAN07
even if the display is hidden. Accumulated hours are
stored in memory when the key switch is turned off.
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Job Timer option
RESET TIME
and press SELECT to view the Job Timer submenu.
The submenus under Job Timer include:
• Hide or Unhide
• Reset Timer Press SELECT to reset timer to zero hours. RESET will
appear when hours are cleared and then display returns
Press NEXT to toggle between HIDE or UNHIDE and to the JOB TIMER menu.
RESET TIME.
Press SELECT to hide or show job timer. HIDDEN or
UNHIDDEN will appear on display and then return to the
JOB TIMER menu.
VD76477,00011ED -19-14DEC06-1/1

Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu—Settings


Settings is the menu option that allows the operator to - Antispill Factory - Restores factory settings
select his/her preferences. • Stabilizer Speeds
- Slow
“SAVING SELECTION” will appear once a preference has - Medium
been selected. - Fast
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu. • Selective Flow (if equipped)
- Flow Rate - 5-35 gallons per minute.
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Settings option and - Flow Relief Pressure
press SELECT to view the Settings submenu. - OFF
- 1200-3500 psi
The submenus under Settings include:
- Fast
• Backhoe Accu-swing™ • Loader Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)
- Off - Slow
- Fast Stop - Medium
- Medium Stop - Fast
- Slow Stop • Backhoe Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)
• Setting Antispill - Slow
- Medium
NOTE: Changing selections in this menu will be - Fast
confirmed with an audible alarm • Differential Lock Speed Limit
- Off
- Boom and Bucket - Locks in settings - On
Accu-swing is a trademark of Deere & Company
JH91824,00009A8 -19-14MAY10-1/1

2-1-11 020113

PN=38
Operation—Operator’s Station

Right-Side Console Functions

TX1059518A —UN—15MAY09
1— Park Brake Switch 7— Not Used 13— Rear Work Lights Switch 17— Display Monitor
2— Key Switch 8— Auxiliary Hydraulic Function 14— Mechanical Front Wheel 18— Blower Speed Knob—If
3— Horn Button Switch and Indicator—If Drive (MFWD) Switch—If Equipped
4— Ride Control Switch and Equipped Equipped 19— Temperature Control
Indicator—If Equipped 9— Not Used 15— Air Suspension Seat Height Knob—If Equipped
5— Beacon Switch—If Equipped 10— Engine Speed Control Knob Adjustment Switch—If 20— Defroster, Heater, and Air
6— Pattern Select Switch and 11— Start Aid Switch—If Equipped Conditioner Switch—If
Indicator—If Equipped Equipped 16— Rear Wiper Switch—If Equipped
12— Side Docking Lights Switch Equipped

1—Park Brake Switch: Push left half of switch to engage 6—Pattern Select Switch and Indicator—If Equipped:
park brake. Push right half of switch to disengage park Push the upper half of switch to activate the excavator
brake. control pattern. Push the lower half of switch to activate
2—Key Switch: This switch has three positions: the backhoe control pattern.

• Position where ignition key can be inserted or removed 7—Not Used


is the “off” position. No circuits are active in this position. 8—Auxiliary Hydraulic Function Switch and
• Turn key clockwise from the “off position. This is the Indicator—If Equipped: Push switch to activate and
“run” position for the engine. deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments. The
• Turn key clockwise from the “run” position. This is the switch has three positions:
“start” position for the engine. After starting engine,
release key. Key will return to “run” position. • Push upper half to activate auxiliary hydraulic function
3—Horn Button: Press button to sound the horn.
• Push to middle position to transfer control to the
backhoe auxiliary function foot switch
4—Ride Control Switch and Indicator—If Equipped: • Push lower half to deactivate the auxiliary hydraulic
Push upper half of switch to activate ride control. Switch function
will light when ride control is activated. Push lower half of 9—Not Used
switch to deactivate ride control.
10—Engine Speed Control Knob: Rotate knob clockwise
5—Beacon Switch—If Equipped: Push the upper half of to increase engine speed. Rotate counterclockwise to
switch to turn beacon light on. Push lower half of switch to decrease engine speed.
turn beacon light off.

Continued on next page TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-1/2

2-1-12 020113

PN=39
Operation—Operator’s Station

11—Start Aid Button—If Equipped: Press and hold 18—Blower Speed Knob—If Equipped: Turn knob
button when engine is cold and cranking to inject starting clockwise to increase blower speed or counterclockwise
fluid into engine during cold weather start-up. to reduce blower speed. The blower knob has four speed
settings plus an “Off” position.
12—Side Docking Lights Switch: Push the upper half
of switch to turn side docking lights on. Push lower half 19—Temperature Control Knob—If Equipped: Turn
of switch to turn lights off. knob to adjust air temperature. Turn clockwise towards
HOT (red) for warmer air (best for heating and defrosting).
13—Rear Working Lights Switch: Push switch to middle Turn counterclockwise towards COLD (blue) for cooler air
position to turn first set of rear work lights on. Push top (best for venting and air conditioning).
half of switch to turn entire set of rear work lights on. Push
bottom half of switch to turn rear work lights off. 20—Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner
Controls—If Equipped:
14—Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Switch—If
Equipped: Push switch up to engage the MFWD axle. NOTE: Blower speed knob; defroster, heater, and air
Push switch down to disengage the MFWD axle. conditioner switch; and temperature control knob
must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper
15—Air Suspension Seat Height Adjustment operation of the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.
Switch—If Equipped:
The defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch has three
CAUTION: Ensure seat is locked in position positions:
before operating machine. A seat that is loose
or not properly locked can cause loss of control • Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the
of machine and injuries or death. air conditioner.
• Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate
Push upper half of switch to increase air suspension seat the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner
height and firmness of ride. Push lower half of switch to compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide
decrease air suspension seat height and firmness of ride. air flow to the front windshield.
• For maximum heater performance, set the rocker
16—Rear Wiper Switch—If Equipped: switch to the middle position. In this position, the air
conditioner compressor is not powered.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to wiper blades,
DO NOT operate wipers if blades are NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature
frozen to windshield. control knob in a middle-to-cool position to
dehumidify air without over cooling.
Push upper half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper on.
Push lower half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper off.
17—Display Monitor: Monitor has six active displays,
two constant and four selectable. See Standard Display
Monitor (SDM) in this section.
TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-2/2

2-1-13 020113

PN=40
Operation—Operator’s Station

Controls—Steering Console

1 2 3 4 5 6 9

H 2O

TX1054141 —UN—08JAN09
TX1054141
1— Work Lights Switch 4— Loader Coupler Pin 6— Front Windshield Wiper 9— Water In Fuel (WIF)
2— Warning Lights Switch Indicator—If Equipped Switch—If Equipped Indicator—If Equipped
3— Loader Coupler Switch—If 5— Front Windshield Washer 7— Turn Signal Switch
Equipped Switch—If Equipped 8— Transmission Control Lever
(TCL)
TX1002635A —UN—13JAN06

TX1002634A —UN—13JAN06
1—Work Lights Switch: Push switch to operate tail
3—Loader Coupler Switch—If Equipped: Push in and
lights and front work lights, if equipped. The switch has
lift switch to the UNLOCK position to retract coupler pins.
three positions:
Coupler pin indicator will illuminate and chime will sound.
• Push upper half to first position to turn all front work Push switch down to return to the LOCK position to engage
lights and tail lights on. coupler pins. Indicator will turn off and chimes will stop.
• Push to middle position to turn tail lights and 2 of 4 front 4—Loader Coupler Pin Indicator—If Equipped:
work lights, if equipped, on.
Indicator will light and chimes will sound when the loader
• Push lower half to turn tail lights and front work lights,
coupler switch is in UNLCOK position and the coupler pins
if equipped, off.
are retracted. Indicator will turn off when quick coupler
2—Warning Lights Switch: Push upper half of switch switch is in LOCK position.
to turn amber warning lights at front and rear of cab on.
5—Front Windshield Washer Switch—If Equipped:
When warning lights switch is on, warning lights indicator,
Push upper half of switch to turn front windshield washer
left turn indicator, and right turn indicator will flash. Push on. Push lower half of switch to turn front windshield
lower half of switch to turn amber warning lights off.
washer off.
If the warning lights switch is on when the key switch is
6—Front Windshield Wiper Switch—If Equipped:
turned to the OFF position, the warning HAZARD LAMPS
ON will display on the Standard Display Monitor (SDM). NOTE: To avoid damage to wiper blades, DO NOT
The audible alarm will sound two times and the warning operate wipers if blades are frozen to windshield.
will remain displayed for 5 seconds, after which the SDM
will power down. Push switch to operate front windshield wiper. The switch
has three positions:
Continued on next page MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-1/2

2-1-14 020113

PN=41
Operation—Operator’s Station

is pushed. Amber turn signal lights flash together when


• Push upper half to first position to turn front windshield warning lights switch (2) is pushed.
wiper on at FAST speed.
• Push to middle position to turn front windshield wiper 8—Transmission Control Lever (TCL):
on at SLOW speed.
• Push lower half to turn front windshield wiper off. NOTE: When TCL is in the Reverse position, only travel
speeds 1 and 2 are operational.
7—Turn Signal Switch: Push switch to signal turning
direction. The switch has three positions: Place TCL in middle (detented) position for neutral. Move
TCL to F (forward travel) or R (reverse travel). Rotate
• Push left half to signal left turn. Left turn indicator will
TCL to select gear (travel speed) range.
flash.
• Middle position is OFF. Indicators will not flash unless 9—Water In Fuel (WIF) Indicator—If Equipped: WIF
warning lights switch is ON. indicator light turns ON when excess water is in auxiliary
• Push right half to signal right turn. Right turn indicator water separator fuel filter.
will flash.
Amber turn signal lights flash individually to signal
direction of turn when left or right half of turn signal switch
MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-2/2

Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If


Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected


machine movement. Always lock hydraulics

TX1014469A —UN—01NOV06
when not operating backhoe.

Push upper half of switch (1) to “Unlock” position to enable


pilot controls. Push lower half of switch to “Lock” position
to disable pilot controls.
If the seat changes operating position or the engine is
shut off, the pilot controls are automatically disabled. To
enable pilot controls, cycle switch to “Lock” position and
back to “Unlocked” position.
VD76477,00011FB -19-01NOV06-1/1

Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine movement. Always verify
control response before operating backhoe. TX1013900A —UN—20OCT06

Push backhoe symbol on switch (1) to select backhoe


hydraulic pattern. Push excavator symbol on switch to
select excavator hydraulic pattern.

1— Pattern Select Switch

VD76477,0001126 -19-19OCT06-1/1

2-1-15 020113

PN=42
Operation—Operator’s Station

Engine Speed Control Knob


Rotate knob (1) clockwise to increase engine speed.
Rotate counterclockwise to decrease engine speed.
The engine speed control knob is operating normally when:

TX1020480A —UN—13MAR07
• Engine speed changes when turning the dial while seat
is in loader position*.
• Engine speed changes when turning the dial while seat
is in the backhoe position*.
• Engine speed does change when turning the dial while
seat is not in backhoe or loader position.
• Engine speed does not change when turning the dial
while service brake pedal is pressed in either backhoe
or loader position.
1— Engine Speed Control Knob
• Engine speed is dialed up to something other than idle
and seat position changes cause the engine speed
control knob to drop out.
*Engine speed control knob must be dialed to low speed
stop position before engine speed will respond to changes
in the dial position.
VD76477,00014B1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

Horn Button
Press the horn button (1) to sound the horn.

1— Horn Button

TX1013813A —UN—20OCT06
VD76477,0001125 -19-19OCT06-1/1

2-1-16 020113

PN=43
Operation—Operator’s Station

Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner


Controls—If Equipped
Blower speed knob (2); defroster, heater, and air
conditioner switch (1); and temperature control knob (3)
must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper operation of
the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.
Push the defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch to
the appropriate setting. The defroster, heater, and air
conditioner switch has three positions:
• Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the air
conditioner. Adjust the blower knob and temperature
control knob as appropriate.

TX1013895A —UN—20OCT06
• Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate
the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner
compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide
air flow to the front windshield. Adjust the blower knob
and temperature control knob as appropriate.
• For maximum heater performance, set the rocker
switch to the middle position. In this position, the air
conditioner compressor is not powered.
Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Earlier Machines
Turn blower speed knob clockwise to increase blower
speed or counterclockwise to reduce blower speed. The
blower knob has four speed settings and an off position.
Turn temperature control knob to adjust air temperature.
Turn clockwise towards HOT (red) for warmer air (best for
heating and defrosting). Turn counterclockwise towards
COLD (blue) for cooler air (best for venting and air
conditioning).
NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature
control knob in a middle-to-cool position to
dehumidify air without over cooling.

1— Defroster, Heater, and Air 3— Temperature Control Knob

TX1059519A —UN—15MAY09
Conditioner Switch
2— Blower Speed Knob

Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Later Machines

TX18203,00004B5 -19-15MAY09-1/1

2-1-17 020113

PN=44
Operation—Operator’s Station

Side Windows—Secondary Exits


The side windows and door windows can open 180°. The
door windows can be used as secondary exits.
To open, pull handle (A) in and away from cab post latch.

T135173 —UN—07NOV00
Retain in open position against fixed window on same
side by fastening knob (B) into socket (C). Turn knob until
tension is felt to prevent window from swinging during
operation.

A—Handle (8 used) C—Socket (2 used)


B—Fastening Knob (2 used)
Right Side Shown

T102093 —UN—16AUG96
CED,OUO1079,381 -19-14JUN00-1/1

Rear Windows
CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected
machine movement. Always lock hydraulics
when opening or closing window.

Squeeze upper rear window latches (A) and slide upper


rear window up or down.
Squeeze middle rear window latches (B) and slide middle
rear window up or down.
Ensure all rear window latches lock into detent positions
on window frame.

A—Upper Rear Window Latch B—Middle Rear Window Latch


(2 used) (2 used) TX1002528A —UN—10JAN06

VD76477,0001127 -19-19OCT06-1/1

2-1-18 020113

PN=45
Operation—Operator’s Station

Adjusting Seat

CAUTION: Ensure seat is locked in position


before operating machine. A seat that is loose
or not properly locked can cause loss of control
of machine and injuries or death.

NOTE: Grease seat base guide rails as needed.

Air Suspension Seat


Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired
position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in
position.

TX1014891A —UN—10NOV06
Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever
to lock seat in position.
Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt
angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position.
Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position
lumbar support for operator's preference.

1— Forward and Aft Lever 3— Back Tilt Lever


2— Pivot Lever 4— Lumbar Support
Adjustment Lever

VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-1/2

Mechanical Suspension Seat

CAUTION: Ensure seat is locked in position


before operating machine. A seat that is loose
or not properly locked can cause loss of control
of machine and injuries or death.

NOTE: With weight adjustment knob turned


counterclockwise (—) as far as it can go and with
no weight on seat, the distance to the floor from
top of seat is 48 cm (19 in). With knob turned
clockwise (+) as far as it can go, the distance
to floor from top of seat is 53 cm (21 in). The
distances will decrease by 5 cm (2 in.) when an TX1015302A —UN—17NOV06

86 kg (190 lb) person sits on seat.

Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired
position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in
position.
Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever
to lock seat in position.
Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt
angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position. 1— Forward and Aft Lever 4— Lumbar Support
2— Pivot Lever Adjustment Lever
Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position 3— Back Tilt Lever 5— Weight Adjustment Knob
lumbar support for operator’s preference.
While NOT sitting on seat, turn weight adjustment knob
(5) to change seat height and ride stiffness.
VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-2/2

2-1-19 020113

PN=46
Operation—Operator’s Station

Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped


Lift lever (A) and tilt steering wheel (B) to operator's
preference. Release lever to lock steering wheel in
position.
For Joystick-to-wheel clearance, tilt steering wheel full-up
before unlocking and pivoting seat.

A—Steering Wheel Tilt Lever B—Steering Wheel

TX1002483A —UN—10JAN06
VD76477,00010F6 -19-23OCT06-1/1

2-1-20 020113

PN=47
Operation—Operator’s Station

12-Volt Accessory Outlets


Accessory outlets (A) are positioned for operator's
convenience.

A—12-Volt Accessory Outlet

TX1014667A —UN—04NOV06
Optional Cab Shown

T134837B —UN—25OCT00
Optional Cab Shown

VD76477,00011B2 -19-03NOV06-1/1

2-1-21 020113

PN=48
Operation—Operating The Machine
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting LUBRICATION: Check lubrication points.
Perform periodic service checks. PROTECTIVE DEVICES: Check ROPS, guards, shields,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Check for worn or frayed wires covers, seat belt, and reverse warning alarm.
and loose or corroded connections. FIRE PREVENTION: Clean machine of debris.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Check for leaks, missing or loose PARK BRAKE: Check for correct operation.
clamps, kinked hoses, and lines or hoses in areas that rub
against each other or other parts. SAFETY: Walk around machine to be sure all persons
are clear from machine area.
BACKHOE AND LOADER: Check for loose, bent, broken
or missing parts and hardware.
CED,OUO1079,468 -19-01SEP10-1/1

2-2-1 020113

PN=49
Operation—Operating The Machine

Check Instruments Before Starting

2 3 4
1

7
17 16 15 5 6
8

TX1002567 —UN—30JAN06
14 13 12 11 10 9
TX1002567

Turn key switch clockwise to ON/RUN position. (Do not


start engine.) The following must occur:
• The audible alarm must sound.
• All LCD segments in the display window (5) must light,
followed by the machine model number and the last

TX1002776 —UN—18JAN06
screen displayed at shutdown.
• All gauges (2—4) must be backlit, and all gauge
needles must cycle from minimum (left) to maximum
(right) in approximately 1 second.
• All indicators must light for 5 seconds including those in
the Sealed Switch Module (SSM). With the engine cold,
the engine oil pressure indicator and STOP indicator
will remain lit, after other indicators go out. Park brake
indicator will also stay ON, as will switch indicators for
previously activated functions. 1— STOP Indicator 12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator
2— Engine Coolant 13— Not Used This Application
NOTE: When the key is turned ON, but before starting, Temperature Gauge 14— MFWD Indicator
a diagnostic sequence is initiated. If a fault is 3— Converter Oil Temperature 15— Engine Alternator Voltage
Gauge Indicator
detected, the corresponding diagnostic trouble 4— Fuel Level Gauge 16— Engine Air Filter
code (DTC) will activate. 5— Display Window Restriction Indicator
6— Park Brake Indicator 17— Engine Oil Pressure
See Operation—Operator’s Station for descriptions of 7— Hydraulic Oil Filter Indicator
indicators. Restriction Indicator 18— Accessory Position—Key
8— Diagnostic Code Indicator Switch
If any indicator fails to light, see your authorized dealer. 9— Joysticks Enabled Indicator 19— STOP Position—Key
10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature Switch
Indicator 20— On/Run Position—Key
11— Not Used This Application Switch
21— Start Position—Key
Switch

VD76477,00011AC -19-22JAN09-1/1

2-2-2 020113

PN=50
Operation—Operating The Machine

Engine Break-In Period dipstick. John Deere Break-In™ Engine Oil


should be used to make up any oil consumed
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage it is critical during the break-in period.
to observe the engine break-in period. Extra
care during the first 250 hours of operation will 3. Change oil and oil filter after first 250 hours (maximum).
result in more satisfactory long-term engine Fill crankcase with the normal seasonal viscosity
performance and life. DO NOT exceed 250 grade oil. See Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)
hours of operation with break-in oil.
4. Watch coolant temperature gauge closely. If coolant
1. Operate the machine at heavy or normal loads with temperature rises above specified limits on the gauge,
minimal idling during the break-in period. During the reduce load on engine. Unless temperature drops
first 20 hours, avoid prolonged periods of engine idling quickly, stop the engine and determine the cause
or sustained maximum load operation. If engine will before resuming operation. See Troubleshooting.
idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine. (Section 4-3.)
2. Check engine oil level more frequently during the 5. Watch oil pressure gauge for pressure within
engine break-in period. specification.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT add make-up oil until the 6. Check serpentine belt for proper alignment and
oil level is BELOW the ADD mark on the seating in pulley grooves.
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
VD76477,00016F2 -19-22DEC10-1/1

Starting the Engine

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death from


a runaway machine. DO NOT start engine by
shorting across starter terminals. Machine will
start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
NEVER start engine while standing on ground.

TS177 —UN—11JAN89
Start engine only from operator’s seat, with
transmission control lever (TCL) in N “neutral”
and park brake engaged.

NOTE: The engine will start with the TCL in gear, but the
transmission will automatically be shifted to neutral
and the display will show “N” as the actual gear. You
will not be able to put the tractor into gear without
first cycling TCL through the neutral range. 2. Sound horn.

1. Sit in seat and fasten seat belt.


VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-1/3

NOTE: Controls and switches must be in the positions


described before starting engine.

3. Move TCL lever (A) to N.


TX1002777A —UN—18JAN06

A—TCL

Continued on next page VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-2/3

2-2-3 020113

PN=51
Operation—Operating The Machine

4. Push the left half of the park brake switch (B) to


engage the park brake.
5. Push the lower half of the ride control switch (C), if
equipped, to deactivate ride control.

TX1013913A —UN—20DEC06
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the turbocharger
and other engine components, let the
engine run at low idle for 30 seconds
before operating machine.

6. Turn engine speed control knob (D) to 1/3 speed.


IMPORTANT: Do not operate starter motor for
more than 30 seconds at a time, or it may be
damaged. If engine does not start, wait at
least 2 minutes before trying again. B—Park Brake Switch D—Engine Speed Control Knob
C—Ride Control Switch—If E—Key Switch
Equipped
7. Turn key switch (E) clockwise to “Start” and hold
in position until engine starts. Release key switch
when engine starts. If engine does not start after 30
seconds, turn key switch to “Off” and wait 2 minutes
before trying again.
VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-3/3

Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start Aid—If


Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding


container. Starting fluid is highly flammable.
Keep container away from heat, sparks, and open

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
flame. Contents are pressurized. Do not puncture
or incinerate container. Remove can from
machine if engine does not need starting fluid.

IMPORTANT: Remove container and install plug in


base to protect start aid components from dust.

IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to engine. Use starting


aid when temperatures are below 0°C (32°F)
and only when engine is COLD.

USING START AID TX1013917A —UN—20OCT06

IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, push and hold


start aid button only when engine is cold and
cranking. Starting fluid is being injected into
engine as long as the start aid button is held.

NOTE: Crank engine for 30 seconds maximum, allowing


2 minutes between cranking periods.

While cranking engine, push start aid button (1).


1— Start Aid Button
Replacing Starting Aid Container
Continued on next page MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-1/2

2-2-4 020113

PN=52
Operation—Operating The Machine

1. Close engine hood. Raise front loader boom and


install loader boom service lock. See Loader Boom
Service Lock. (Section 3-2.)
2. Open engine hood. See Opening and Closing Engine
Hood. (Section 3-2.)

TX1035810A —UN—20MAR08
3. Loosen clamp (2).
4. Turn start aid container (3) counterclockwise to
remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove can from machine if engine
does not need starting fluid. Remove can from
container and install plug (4) in base to protect
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
start aid components from dust.

5. Remove safety cap from new container.


6. Remove plug and turn container clockwise in starting
aid base to install.

TX1035809A —UN—01FEB08
7. Tighten clamp.
8. Close engine hood.

2— Clamp 4— Plug
3— Start Aid Container

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-2/2

Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped Plug coolant heater into a 115-volt outlet 10 hours before
starting the engine.
CAUTION: Prevent possible personal injury from
an electrical shock. Use a heavy-duty, grounded
cord to connect heater to electrical power.
TX,25,BD2080 -19-07MAR07-1/1

Warm-Up
IMPORTANT: To avoid carbon build-up in engine
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper lubrication, idle and to use fuel in most efficient manner, do
engine at 1/3 speed for 5 minutes. Extend not allow machine to idle at low rpm.
period as necessary when operating at
temperatures below freezing. • Do not run engine at fast or slow idle.
• Operate machine under light loads for first 5 minutes
• Before moving machine, run at 1/3 speed for at least 5 once engine is warm.
minutes. • Check instruments regularly.
TX,25,BD2082 -19-15OCT08-1/1

2-2-5 020113

PN=53
Operation—Operating The Machine

Cold Weather Warm-Up

CAUTION: Prevent injury from moving backhoe. 1. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 15 minutes.
Backhoe may overshoot in extreme cold
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to bucket
conditions. Allow backhoe to warm up.
leveling tube due to cold oil, cycle bucket
three times at hood height before using
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil is cold, hydraulic
under normal operation.
functions move slowly. Do not attempt machine
operations until hydraulic functions move
2. Raise loader lift arms to hood height. Cycle bucket
at close-to-normal cycle times.
from stop to stop three times.
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warming up 3. Cycle all remaining hydraulic functions to distribute
period will be necessary. warmed oil until all functions operate freely.
Avoid sudden operation of hydraulic functions until engine
is thoroughly warmed up. Remove ice, snow, and mud
from machine before operation.
VD76477,0001386 -19-08JAN07-1/1

Ride Control Operation—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected boom or bucket movement when
equipped with ride control. Ride control

TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
accumulator energy must be discharged when
working on hydraulic components. Turn ignition
switch “On”. Push ride control switch “On” and
move loader control lever to “Float” position.
Do not have the ride control switch “On”
when starting the machine; the machine
may move if the ride control switch is “On”
and the machine is started.
Do not have ride control engaged when
operating the loader; the ride control system
may cause unexpected movement.

TX1013990A —UN—26OCT06
The ride control system has an accumulator and valve
in the loader circuit.
Operating Ride Control
Push upper half of ride control switch (1) to improve
machine ride and reduce tire flexing when traveling over
rough terrain at a high speed with loaded bucket, or
when transporting with an empty bucket. The ride control
indicator (2) will remain lit while ride control is engaged.
If engine is stopped with ride control engaged, ride control 1— Ride Control Switch 2— Ride Control Indicator
switch will remain in the “On” position and ride control will
be engaged when the machine is restarted. Always push
lower half of ride control switch to disengage ride control Discharging the Ride Control Circuit for Service
before starting the machine.
Discharge hydraulic pressure from the ride control
NOTE: With ride control engaged, the front end of the system before performing maintenance. See Discharge
machine will not remain raised if lifted off the ground Ride Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.
with the front loader. The front end of the machine (Section 4-1.)
will drift back to the ground. To hold front end up
while using the backhoe, disengage ride control.
VD76477,0001129 -19-18DEC07-1/1

2-2-6 020113

PN=54
Operation—Operating The Machine

Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped


1. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.
2. Use pilot control wrist rests (1) to pull right and left
pilot control towers towards operator.

T162834B —UN—02JAN03
3. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (2) to “Unlock”
position to enable pilot controls.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine movement. Always lock
hydraulics when not operating backhoe.

4. Push pilot control enable/disable switch to “Lock”


position to disable pilot controls. 1— Pilot Control Wrist Rests 2— Pilot Control Enable/Dis-
able Switch
NOTE: Alarm will sound and monitor will display “Hoe”
and “On” when pilot controls are enabled and
seat is not in backhoe position.
Pilot Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.
If pilot controls are automatically disabled, cycle (Section 4-1.)
switch to “Lock” position and back to “Unlock”
position to enable pilot controls.

Discharge hydraulic pressure from the pilot control


system before performing maintenance. See Discharge
HG31779,00001BB -19-15OCT08-1/1

Driving the Machine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine movement. Machine will
turn in direction of brake pedal if only one

T132020B —UN—05JUL00
brake pedal is applied. Connect brake pedals
together before traveling at high speed.

1. Engage brake pedal locking bar (A) to lock left and


right brake pedals (B and C) together. Keep brake
pedal locking bar engaged unless brakes are to be
used to aid in turning.

CAUTION: Use a seat belt to minimize chance of


injury from an accident such as an overturn. A—Brake Pedal Locking Bar C—Right Brake Pedal
B—Left Brake Pedal

2. Fasten seat belt.


Continued on next page MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-1/3

2-2-7 020113

PN=55
Operation—Operating The Machine

3. Move engine speed control knob (H) to 1/3 speed and


start engine.
NOTE: Park brake indicator will light, alarm will sound,
and STOP indicator will light if transmission control

TX1013925A —UN—23OCT06
lever (TCL) is moved out of NEUTRAL while park
brake is engaged. Disengage the park brake
before moving the TCL out of neutral.
If park brake is disengaged when engine is
stopped, it automatically engages. If engine is
then started with right half of the park brake switch
pushed, operator must push left half of park brake
switch, then push right half of park brake switch to
disengage park brake before driving machine.

4. Push right half of park brake switch (F) to disengage


the park brake.

TX1013923A —UN—20DEC06
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Never
rely on TCL and gearshift lever to keep
machine from moving. Always engage park
brake to hold machine.

5. Use TCL (D) to change direction of travel.


• Reduce speed when changing direction of travel.
• Move TCL to F to travel forward and to R to travel D—Transmission Control Lever G—Ride Control Switch—If
in reverse.
(TCL) Equipped
• Move TCL to N when machine is not moving. TCL E—Gear Range Pointer H—Engine Speed Control Knob
will drop to a detented position when in neutral. F— Park Brake Switch J— Key Switch

6. TCL/range lever also selects forward gear ranges 1, 2,


3, and 4 and reverse ranges 1 and 2.
• Gear position is indicated by the gear range pointer
• Rotate handle on TCL (D) to select gear position. (E).
MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-2/3

7. Vary travel speed when driving using engine speed


control pedal (K).

K—Engine Speed Control


Pedal TX1013924A —UN—23OCT06

MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-3/3

2-2-8 020113

PN=56
Operation—Operating The Machine

Cruise Control
When operating the machine with the seat facing the
steering wheel, cruise control can be activated by the
operator. This feature is useful for road travel, or when

TX1020480A —UN—13MAR07
traversing rough ground on a job site, where it is difficult
to maintain a steady speed with the accelerator pedal.
To set cruise control, use the engine speed control knob
(1) to set engine speed to desired level. Engine speed will
remain at that setting until brake pedals are depressed,
at which time engine speed will automatically return to
idle. In order to reengage cruise control, the engine speed
control knob must be returned to idle position and then
reset to desired speed.
1— Engine Speed Control Knob
If the cruise control is set to a speed lower than high idle,
the accelerator pedal can be used to accelerate from the
selected speed setting up to high idle. If operator then
removes foot from accelerator pedal, speed will return to
the prior selected setting.
VD76477,00014B8 -19-16MAR07-1/1

Operating Stabilizers

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine movement. Stabilizers
must be set on a firm surface. Do not

TX1014050A —UN—25OCT06
dig under stabilizers. Be alert to possible
machine movement when raising stabilizers
and loader bucket.

Before operating the backhoe, use stabilizers to lift and


level the machine. Use the levers to move stabilizers from
raised position (A and C) to lowered position (B and D).
Stabilizer feet on 310J, 310SJ are reversible for use on
paved and unpaved surfaces. See Reversing Stabilizer
Feet—310J, 310SJ. (Section 4-1.)

A—Left Stabilizer Up C—Right Stabilizer Up


B—Left Stabilizer Down D—Right Stabilizer Down

T102200 —UN—24AUG96

VD76477,000113B -19-24OCT06-1/1

2-2-9 020113

PN=57
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Boom Lock


IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage,
unlock boom before operating backhoe.

Disengaging the Boom Lock


1. Raise boom against stops to release tension on boom
lock (A).
2. Pull boom lock control lever (B) toward operator to
disengage boom lock from boom hooks (unlocked
position).
3. Lower boom so boom hooks are clear of boom lock.
Release boom lock control lever.

T131772B —UN—19JUN00
Engaging the Boom Lock
1. Pull boom lock control lever toward operator to raise
boom lock.
2. Raise boom against stops.
3. Release boom lock control lever to engage boom lock
with boom hooks (locked position).
4. After machine shutdown, move boom control lever to
release hydraulic pressure and put tension on boom
lock.

T131758C —UN—15JUN00
A—Boom Lock B—Boom Lock Control Lever

Optional Two-Lever, Six-Function Configuration Shown

T162770B —UN—12DEC02

Optional Pilot Controls Shown

VD76477,00010CE -19-16OCT06-1/1

2-2-10 020113

PN=58
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Swing Lock


IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage,
remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.

Disengaging the Swing Lock

T132293B —UN—11JUL00
Remove swing lock pin (A) from swing lock mounting hole
(B) and install pin in storage position in operator’s station.
Engaging the Swing Lock
Remove swing lock pin from storage position in operator's
station and install pin in swing lock mounting hole.

A—Swing Lock Pin B—Swing Lock Mounting Hole

T131772C —UN—19JUN00
VD76477,00011F0 -19-31OCT06-1/1

Operating Swing Lock Pin


IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage,
remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.
CED,OUO1079,418 -19-07JUL00-1/1

2-2-11 020113

PN=59
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe—John Deere Two-Lever Controls

CAUTION: Several control patterns are available


for this backhoe. Always verify control
response before operating.
Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected
machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe

T132032B —UN—11JUL00
from outside the operator station. Only operate
when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation
position with stabilizers down.

IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not


swing boom into stabilizers.

NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation


position, seat position sensor will sound an audible
alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission
control lever (TCL) is moved to F or R.

A conversion kit for changing controls is available from


your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to other
controls MUST be installed.
Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as
shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired
directions.
For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving
and operate more than one component at a time.

T132029C —UN—11JUL00
A—Boom Lower E—Dipperstick Raise
B—Boom Raise F— Dipperstick Lower
C—Boom Swing Left G—Bucket Load
D—Boom Swing Right H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,00011A0 -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-2-12 020113

PN=60
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe—Excavator Two-Lever Controls

CAUTION: Several control patterns are available


for this backhoe. Always verify control
response before operating.
Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected
machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe

T132033B —UN—11JUL00
from outside the operator station. Only operate
when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation
position with stabilizers down.

IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not


swing boom into stabilizers.

NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation


position, seat position sensor will sound an audible
alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission
control lever is moved to F or R.

A conversion kit for changing John Deere two-lever


controls to excavator two-lever controls is available from
your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to the
controls MUST be installed.
Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as
shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired
directions.
For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving
and operate more than one component at a time.

T132029C —UN—11JUL00
A—Boom Lower E—Dipperstick Raise
B—Boom Raise F— Dipperstick Lower
C—Boom Swing Left G—Bucket Load
D—Boom Swing Right H—Bucket Dump

VD76477,00011A1 -19-14JUL09-1/1

2-2-13 020113

PN=61
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot


Controls
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Always lock
hydraulics when not operating backhoe. Never

T162842B —UN—12DEC02
place any part of body beyond window frame. It
could be crushed by the boom if boom control
lever is accidently bumped or otherwise engaged.
Make sure you know the location and function
of each control before operating.

Never place any part of the body beyond the window


frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.
The machine is factory equipped with the control pattern
shown.
NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond
to the black-on-yellow labels located on the cab post.

When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The


machine will remain positioned.

A—Boom Lower E—Dipperstick Raise


B—Boom Raise F— Dipperstick Lower
C—Boom Swing Left G—Bucket Load
D—Boom Swing Right H—Bucket Dump

T132029C —UN—11JUL00
VD76477,000134A -19-20DEC06-1/1

2-2-14 020113

PN=62
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot


Controls
CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected
machine movement. Always lock hydraulics
when not operating backhoe. Never place any

T163835B —UN—13JAN03
part of body beyond window frame. It could
be crushed by the boom if boom control lever
is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged.
Make sure you know the location and function
of each control before operating.

Never place any part of the body beyond the window


frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.
NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond
to the black-on-white labels located on the cab post.

When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The


machine will remain positioned.

A—Boom Lower E—Dipperstick Raise


B—Boom Raise F— Dipperstick Lower
C—Boom Swing Left G—Bucket Load
D—Boom Swing Right H—Bucket Dump

T132029C —UN—11JUL00
VD76477,000134B -19-20DEC06-1/1

2-2-15 020113

PN=63
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If


Equipped
Push extendible dipperstick control pedal with toe or heel
to extend (I) or retract (J) the extendible dipperstick.

T132032C —UN—11JUL00
I— Extendible Dipperstick J— Extendible Dipperstick
Extend Retract

Optional Two-Lever, Six-Function Configuration Shown

T162845B —UN—12DEC02
Optional Pilot Controls Shown

T132029D —UN—11JUL00

CED,OUO1079,419 -19-23JAN03-1/1

2-2-16 020113

PN=64
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Extendible Dipperstick With


Attachments
When using attachments, it is recommended to retract
extendible dipperstick and lock in place. Operating
hydraulic hammers, compactors, etc., with dipperstick

T103835 —UN—11OCT96
extended may cause abnormal wear and stress on
dipperstick components and ultimately shorten their life.

AM40430,0000072 -19-15OCT08-1/1

Operating Extendible Dipperstick Lock—If


Equipped

CAUTION: To prevent serious injury, always


install locking pin from ground.

Always lower backhoe to ground and stop engine before


removing or installing extendible dipperstick locking pin.
Disengaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock
1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick
locking pin (A).
2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from

T131775B —UN—19JUN00
locking position (C) and install extendible dipperstick
locking pin in storage position (B).
3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking
pin.
Engaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock
1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick
locking pin.
A—Extendible Dipperstick C—Locking Position
2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from Locking Pin
storage position and install extendible dipperstick B—Storage Position
locking pin in locking position.
3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking
pin.
CED,OUO1079,412 -19-07JUL00-1/1

2-2-17 020113

PN=65
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped

TX1047838A —UN—26AUG08

TX1047839A —UN—29AUG08
Optional Two-Lever, Six-Function Configuration Shown

TX1047844A —UN—28AUG08

TX1048098A —UN—29AUG08
Optional Pilot Controls Shown

A—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic B—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic C—Flow Selector Knob


Selective Flow Switch Selective Flow Foot Switch

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Switches 1. Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow
The backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow switch (A) by pressing lower half of backhoe auxiliary hydraulic
has three positions: selective flow switch (A).

• Push upper half to activate the backhoe auxiliary IMPORTANT: To avoid potential machine damage,
hydraulic selective flow. machine must be “OFF” when adjusting
• Toggle to middle position to transfer control to the selective flow solenoid control valve.
backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow foot switch.
• Push lower half to deactivate the backhoe auxiliary 2. To adjust flow, rotate flow selector knob (C) until the
hydraulic selective flow. desired flow setting is observed. The six flow settings
are:
When the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow
switch is in the middle position, push the backhoe auxiliary • 34 L/min (9 gpm)
hydraulic selective flow foot switch (B) to activate and • 49 L/min (13 gpm)
deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments. • 60 L/min (16 gpm)
• 68 L/min (18 gpm)
Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow when • 83 L/min (22 gpm)
no attachment is installed, when changing attachments, • 94 L/min (25 gpm)
or when installed attachments are not in use.
Selective Flow Valve Adjustment
ER93822,0000262 -19-02SEP08-1/1

2-2-18 020113

PN=66
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Functions—If Equipped

TX1048366A —UN—10SEP08

TX1048365A —UN—10SEP08
Manual Controls Shown Optional Pilot Controls Shown

1— Fifth-Function Pedal 2— Sixth-Function Pedal

Fifth-Function Pedal Sixth-Function Pedal


Operate fifth-function pedal (1) to control the attachment.
Operate sixth-function pedal (2) to control the attachment.
See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment
See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment
operator's manual for more information.
operator's manual for more information.
NOTE: Fifth-function pedal will operate extendible
dipperstick if equipped.
ER93822,0000263 -19-15OCT08-1/1

2-2-19 020113

PN=67
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped

TX1048226A —UN—04SEP08

TX1048220A —UN—04SEP08
Manual Controls Shown Optional Pilot Controls Shown

NOTE: Hydraulic thumb control pedal may change


location based on if machine is equipped with
extendible dipperstick. If equipped with extendible
dipperstick the left auxiliary hydraulic function
control pedal will operate thumb. If equipped with
standard dipperstick the right auxiliary hydraulic
control pedal will operate thumb.

Push appropriate auxiliary hydraulic function control pedal


(1 or 2) with heal or toe to close (3) or open (4) hydraulic
thumb.

1— Left Auxiliary Hydraulic 3— Close Thumb


Function Control Pedal 4— Open Thumb

TX1047774A —UN—04SEP08
2— Right Auxiliary Hydraulic
Function Control Pedal (or
Extendible Dipperstick—If
Equipped)

Hydraulic Thumb Movement

JH91824,000029C -19-22APR09-1/1

2-2-20 020113

PN=68
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped

CAUTION:
Prevent serious injury or death from unexpected

TX1021632A —UN—09APR07
machine movement. Ensure coupler is attached
properly to attachment.

1. Locking Coupler:
Position machine and coupler to pick up desired
attachment.
2. Move the adjustable coupler hook (3) by turning the
hex head (5) clockwise into the fully retracted position.
3. Lower front coupler hook (4) to pin (2).
4. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the
ground.

TX1021636A —UN—09APR07
5. Lower adjustable coupler hook to pin (1).
NOTE: Do not torque hex head to greater than
270 N·m (200 lb-ft).

6. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism


counterclockwise until the adjustable coupler hook
contacts the back pin.

CAUTION: Ensure the supplement hex lock is 1— Pin 4— Front Coupler Hook
engaged. If this is not locked over the hex head, 2— Pin 5— Hex Head
3— Adjustable Coupler Hook 6— Supplemental Lock
the screw can turn and the attachment can fall off.

7. Visually check the coupler to verify that both hooks are


firmly in contact with the attachment pins. Ensure the 3. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the
supplemental lock (6) is engaged. ground.
8. Verify the attachment is properly locked by performing 4. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism
a ground test before using. clockwise until the adjustable coupler hook is clear
9. Place the bucket on the ground and uncurl to ensure from the back pin. Loosen the screw mechanism with
the attachment is secured to the coupler. the hand rachet to fully release the attachment pin
from the coupler.
Unlocking Coupler:
5. Keeping the attachment close to the ground, slowly
1. Position machine and coupler to disconnect from the retract the bucket cylinder.
attachment.
6. With the attachment flat on the ground, uncurl the
2. Rotate the coupler so that the center of the attachment coupler from the attachment. Assure the attachment
pin (2) and center of the adjustable coupler hook are is on a flat, stable surface and will not move when
in line. released from the coupler.
VD76477,00014EB -19-21JUL09-1/1

2-2-21 020113

PN=69
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine motion. The attachment
could fall if not properly installed to loader

TX1002790A —UN—18JAN06
coupler. Operator must be aware of all
bystanders at the worksite.

1. Position machine on firm, level ground.


2. Lower boom. Stop machine.
3. Push in and lift loader coupler switch (1) to the “unlock”
position to retract coupler pins. Loader coupler pin
indicator (2) will illuminate and chime will sound.
4. Operate bucket control to move coupler frame forward.
5. Drive forward. Guide top of coupler frame into
attachment mounting hooks.

TX1014133A —UN—26OCT06
6. Raise boom. Tilt mounting frame rearward until
attachment is against coupler.
7. Push coupler switch down to the “lock” position to
engage coupler pins. Indicator light will turn off and
chime will stop sounding.
NOTE: If attachment is not properly latched, Left Side Shown
disconnect and attach again.

8. Raise boom. Visually inspect attachment to verify 1— Loader Coupler Switch—If 3— Loader Coupler Pin Plate (1
Equipped on each side)
that loader coupler pin plate (3) is pressed against 2— Loader Coupler Pin 4— Loader Coupler Structure
the loader coupler structure (4) and that the pins are Indicator—If Equipped (1 on each side)
engaged in attachment mounting holes.
VD76477,0001142 -19-06JUL09-1/1

2-2-22 020113

PN=70
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Loader
IMPORTANT: Operate loader facing forward in
the operator’s seat only.

IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader

T131727D —UN—21JUL00
boom while the engine hood is open. Always
close the engine hood fully before moving
the front loader boom, or severe damage to
the engine hood will occur. See Opening and
Closing Engine Hood. (Section 3-2.)

NOTE: Loader control lever will return to neutral if


released during normal loader operation. Optional Three-Function Controls Shown

Push lever in following directions for corresponding loader


movements:
NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Float” when
moved fully forward (A). Loader control lever will
stay in “Float” until it is manually moved.

NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Return-to-Dig”


when bucket is dumped and lever is moved
fully left (C). Lever will return to neutral when
bucket is in dig position.
Loader control lever will give resistance when
boom is raised and lever is held in “Bucket
Roll-Back” (C). Lever will return to neutral

T132341B —UN—11JUL00
when bucket is self-leveled.

Use the “Float” and “Return-to-Dig” detents at the same


time to quickly position the front loader bucket for loading,
as when driving into a pile of material. When front loader
boom and bucket are in correct position, the loader control
lever will automatically release from “Return-to-Dig”
detent, but will remain in “Float” detent.
For faster cycle times, fully extend lever in desired A—Boom Lower and Float C—Bucket Roll-Back and
B—Boom Raise Return-to-Dig
direction, run engine at fast idle, and move boom and D—Bucket Dump
bucket at same time.
VD76477,000138B -19-08JAN07-1/1

2-2-23 020113

PN=71
Operation—Operating The Machine

Operating Differential Lock

CAUTION: Prevent injury from loss of machine


control. DO NOT engage differential lock when
driving at high speed or steering will be limited.

TX1060003A —UN—29MAY09
Avoid machine damage and prevent injury
from loss of machine control. DO NOT engage
differential lock when turning.
Prevent injury from unexpected machine
movement. When poor traction results in
one rear tire spinning, slow the tire's rotation
before engaging differential lock. Internal axle
damage can occur if lock is applied with one
rear wheel spinning at high speed. 1— Differential Lock Switch

IMPORTANT: Avoid axle damage. Engage differential


lock only while machine is at idle.
To engage rear differential lock, first, reduce engine speed
The differential lock function has a setting in the Standard to idle, then, press down and hold differential lock switch
Display Monitor (SDM) called DIFF LOCK SPEED LIMIT, (1). When rear differential is locked, both rear wheels turn
OFF or On. When enabled (ON) the system automatically at the same speed.
disables the differential lock system when engine speed is Unequal traction will keep the rear differential locked. If
over 1000 RPM even though the floor switch is engaged. the differential lock foot switch is released, the differential
When the function is disable (OFF) the operator has full lock disengages automatically when traction evens out.
control of the differential locking system with the floor Hold differential lock switch continuously to keep rear
switch. differential locked when traction is even.
JH91824,00009AD -19-10FEB10-1/1

Operating Mechanical Front Wheel Drive


(MFWD)—If Equipped
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible gear damage.
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) can

TX1013937A —UN—23OCT06
be engaged and disengaged while driving,
except in cases of unequal traction. Machine
must be stopped before engaging MFWD
during unequal traction.

NOTE: For best performance, fuel economy, and tire


wear, operate MFWD only when needed.
To achieve best MFWD performance, be sure
front tires are inflated to proper air pressure. See
Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.)

NOTE: Whenever the TCL is in the 4F position, MFWD


will be automatically disengaged. However, in
TX1013996A —UN—26OCT06

effort to increase braking performance, MFWD


will automatically engage in 4F whenever the
service brakes are applied.

Push MFWD switch (1) up to engage MFWD drive shaft.


MFWD indicator (2) will remain lit while MFWD is engaged.
Push MFWD switch down to disengage MFWD.

1— MFWD Switch 2— MFWD Indicator

ER93822,0000077 -19-18DEC07-1/1

2-2-24 020113

PN=72
Operation—Operating The Machine

Lifting

CAUTION: Never move the load suddenly. Never


move load over person’s head. DO NOT allow
any persons near the load. Keep all persons

TX1014618A —UN—03NOV06
away from raised load until blocks are supporting
it or load is sitting on the ground.
Ensure chain/sling is in good condition and
is rated for load being lifted.

1. For maximum lifting capability, attach chain/sling to


buckets at positions shown. For capacities of backhoe
see Miscellaneous—Specifications. (Section 4-6.) Lifting With Front Loader

2. Attach a hand line to load for stability. Use long


enough line to ensure that person holding it is a safe
distance from load.
3. Before lifting, perform following test of load stability:

TX1014625A —UN—03NOV06
NOTE: If using backhoe to lift, raise rear tires off ground
50 mm (2 in.) and ensure machine is level. If
ground is soft, place boards or other wide support
under stabilizer feet to increase stability.

a. Park machine close to load.


b. Attach load to chain/sling. Lifting With Backhoe
c. Raise load 50 mm (2 in.) above ground.
d. If using backhoe, swing load all the way to one side. so machine can successfully perform test. Do not lift load
until machine can perform test at acceptable level.
e. While keeping load close to the ground, extend it
away from machine.
If there is any indication of reduced stability of the machine,
lower load to the ground and make necessary adjustments
VD76477,0001207 -19-07MAR07-1/1

Parking the Machine


IMPORTANT: Before stopping engine that has been
operating at working load, idle at 1/3 speed
for 1—2 minutes to cool hot parts. If engine
stalls while operating under load, restart

TX1081803A —UN—13SEP10
immediately and idle at 1/3 speed for 1—2
minutes before stopping to allow coolant to
continue circulating through engine.

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger, if equipped, may be


damaged if engine is not properly shut down.

1. Park machine on a level surface. Transmission Control Lever


2. Lower all equipment to ground.
1— Transmission Control Lever
3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) (1) to N. (TCL)

Continued on next page VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-1/2

2-2-25 020113

PN=73
Operation—Operating The Machine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected machine movement. Never rely on
transmission control lever (TCL) and gearshift
lever to keep machine from moving. Always
engage park brake to hold machine.

4. Push left half of park brake switch (2) to engage park


brake.
5. Move engine speed control lever (3) to 1/3 speed and
run engine with no load for 1—2 minutes.
4 2 3
6. Move engine speed control lever to slow idle.
7. Turn key switch (4) to “Off” to stop engine. Remove

TX1081616 —UN—13SEP10
key from key switch.
8. Release hydraulic pressure by moving control levers
until equipment does not move.

2— Park Brake Switch 4— Key Switch


3— Engine Speed Control
Lever

VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-2/2

Loading Machine on a Trailer


1. Keep trailer bed clean. Put wheel chocks against
trailer wheels.
2. Use a ramp or loading dock. Ramps must be strong
enough, have a low angle, and correct height. Load
and unload machine on a level surface.

TX1070084 —UN—26JAN10
3. Fasten seat belt before starting engine. Allow engine
to run for several minutes.
4. Install the extendible dipperstick locking pin, if
equipped, and engage the backhoe swing lock.
5. Drive the machine up ramps slowly with centerline of
machine over centerline of trailer. Machine Tie Down Locations
6. Lower loader bucket onto blocks or trailer bed.
7. Lower backhoe boom until bucket rests on trailer bed. 10. Fasten backhoe bucket to trailer with chains or cables
to prevent movement during transport.
8. Stop engine.
11. Cover engine exhaust pipe opening with tape to keep
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic system dust and rain out of pipe.
damage. Fasten chains or cables to machine
at proper locations.

9. Fasten chains or cables from trailer to frame tie-downs.


Do not route chains or cables over or against hydraulic
lines or hoses.
HG31779,000007C -19-26JAN10-1/1

2-2-26 020113

PN=74
Operation—Operating The Machine

Towing
IMPORTANT: Engine cannot be started by towing.
Damage to transmission may result. DO
NOT tow machine faster than 10 km/hr (6

TX1013758A —UN—18OCT06
mph) or any longer than 1 hour.

Towing IS NOT recommended. If you MUST tow machine,


use the following procedure:
1. Stop engine.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death


from unexpected machine movement. Block
wheels to prevent machine movement before
disengaging park brake. A—Cap Screw (4 used) B—Cab Floor Access Plate

2. Block tires securely.


3. Attach towing machine and towed machine as closely
together as possible with chains.
4. If your machine is equipped with mechanical front
wheel drive (MFWD), remove the front axle drive shaft.
5. Move gearshift lever and transmission control lever
(TCL) to N.
6. Remove front half of rubber mat from floor of
operator's station. Remove cap screws (A) and cab
floor access plate (B).
Continued on next page VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-1/2

2-2-27 020113

PN=75
Operation—Operating The Machine

IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to park brake


assembly from heat build-up, park brake
must be manually disengaged.

7. Release park brake manually for towing. Loosen hex


nuts (B) and turn both park brake adjustment cap

T132351B —UN—13JUL00
screws (A) completely in.
8. Remove blocks from tires and tow machine.
9. When towing is completed, block tires and engage
park brake to hold machine. Turn both park brake
adjustment cap screws out to specification (C) as
illustrated.
Specification
Park Brake Adjustment
Cap Screw-to-Park Brake
Housing—Distance.................................................................. 27 + 1 mm
1.06 + 0.04 in.

T102655 —UN—10SEP96
10. Tighten hex nuts to lock cap screws in position.
11. Install central floor access plate and rubber floor mat.
12. Install front axle drive shaft, if removed.

A—Park Brake Adjustment Cap C—Specification


Screw (2 used)
B—Hex Nut (2 used)

VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-2/2

2-2-28 020113

PN=76
Maintenance—Machine
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the
Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
diesel fuel available in your area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
temperature requirements of the geographical area in mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED
which they are marketed. • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000–5000 mg/kg
(1000–5000 ppm) REDUCES oil and filter change
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are intervals.
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use at all dealer
percentage mixture levels. Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Required Fuel Properties • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 500
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties: mg/kg (500 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 500–5000 mg/kg
Cetane number of 43 minimum. Cetane number greater (500–5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below interval
–20°C (–4°F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft.). • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) should be at least 5°C dealer
(9°F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud
Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature. Sulfur Content for Other Engines
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000
0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. mg/kg (5000 ppm) is recommended.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000
mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
all existing emissions regulations for the area in which
intervals.
the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur
content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm). IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B engines
• Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a IMPORTANT: Improper fuel additive usage may
maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content. cause damage on fuel injection equipment
of diesel engines.
DX,FUEL1 -19-11APR11-1/1

Lubricity of Diesel Fuel


Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States, If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection the specified concentration.
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity. Lubricity of Biodiesel Fuel
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with biodiesel
in your machine demonstrates good blends up to B20 (20% biodiesel). Further increase in
lubricity characteristics. lubricity is limited for biodiesel blends greater than B20.

Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of


0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
DX,FUEL5 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-1 020113

PN=77
Maintenance—Machine

Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel

CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
weather. replace it with an original vented cap.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practicable to minimize
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
condensation.
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water supplier for recommendations.
content of the fuel regularly.
DX,FUEL4 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-2 020113

PN=78
Maintenance—Machine

Biodiesel Fuel
Biodiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
The petroleum diesel portion of all biodiesel blends must
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum
(EU) commercial standards.
diesel fuel on a volume basis.
Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
Before using fuel containing biodiesel, review the
purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in
Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
this Operator’s Manual.
Producer (as certified by the National Biodiesel Board).
Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using
Biodiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the
biofuels.
maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214
All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter (Released can result in more rapid ash loading and require more
2011 and After) frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement,
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum when using biodiesel fuel, particularly if switching from
diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20 diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine.
can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% of the date of biodiesel manufacture. If used, biodiesel
reduction in fuel economy when using B20. blends above B20 must be used within 45 days from the
date of biodiesel manufacture.
Biodiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the
engine’s emission control systems and should not be When using biodiesel blends up to B20, the following
used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent must be considered:
stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased
intervals for ash removal. • Cold weather flow degradation
• Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain microbial growth)
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when • Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
using B20, and are recommended when using lower when first switching to biodiesel on used engines.)
biodiesel blends. • Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
(primarily an issue with older engines)
All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter • Possible reduction of service life of engine components
(Primarily Released Prior to 2012)
Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum provided in this Operator’s Manual.
diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20
can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent conditioners to improve storage and performance with
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% biodiesel fuels.
reduction in fuel economy when using B20.
The following must also be considered if using biodiesel
These John Deere engines can operate on biodiesel blends above B20:
blends above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel). Operate at
levels above B20 ONLY if the biodiesel is permitted by law • Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in
power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved
and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily available
fuel conditioners are not used
in Europe). Engines operating on biodiesel blends above
B20 might not fully comply with or be permitted by all • Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent
oil changes)
applicable emissions regulations. Expect up to a 12%
reduction in power and an 18% reduction in fuel economy • Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components
when using 100% biodiesel. • Possible formation of sludge and sediments
• Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain temperatures
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when • Possible compatibility issues with other materials
using B20, and are recommended when using lower (including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
biodiesel blends. used in fuel handling equipment
• Possible reduction in water separator efficiency
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations • Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel
Continued on next page DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-1/2

3-1-3 020113

PN=79
Maintenance—Machine

• Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
• Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
degradation (primarily an issue with older engines) concentration in John Deere engines. Their
• Possible high acid levels within fuel system use could cause engine failure.
• Because biodiesel blends above B20 contain more
ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid
ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the
Exhaust Filter (if present)
DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-2/2

Testing Diesel Fuel operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content, diesel fuel analysis.
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-4 020113

PN=80
Maintenance—Machine

Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines


John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate
Diesel Fuel Flow Additive
effectively in cold weather.
However, for effective starting and cold weather operation, Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner
a little extra care is necessary. The information below (winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or
outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel
weather may have on starting and operation of your (No. 2-D in North America) during the cold weather
engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional season. This generally extends operability to about 10°C
information and local availability of cold weather aids. (18°F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even
lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.
Use Winter Grade Fuel
IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use
fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for cold with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud instructions on label.
point and a lower pour point.
BioDiesel
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax will begin to
form in the fuel and this wax causes fuel filters to plug. When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation can
Pour point is the lowest temperature at which movement occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John Deere
of the fuel is observed. Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula) at
5°C (41°F) to treat biodiesel fuels during the cold weather
NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower season. Use B5 or lower blends at temperatures below
Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel 0°C (32°F). Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel
may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not at temperatures below -10°C (14°F).
cause any other engine performance effects. Check
the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting Winterfronts
for low power complaints in cold weather operation.
Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not
Air Intake Heater recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use
can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge
An air intake heater is an available option for some air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life,
engines to aid cold weather starting. loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may
also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components
Ether potentially causing premature failures.
An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold weather If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close
starting. off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the
center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not time should the air blockage device be applied directly
use ether when starting an engine equipped to the radiator core.
with glow plugs or an air intake heater.
Radiator Shutters
Coolant Heater If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator
An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available shutter system, this system should be regulated in such a
option to aid cold weather starting. way that the shutters are completely open by the time the
coolant reaches 93°C (200°F) to prevent excessive intake
Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant manifold temperatures. Manually controlled systems are
Concentration not recommended.

Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be
expected air temperature range between oil changes completely open by the time the intake manifold air
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature
recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE out of the charge air cooler.
COOLANT requirements in this section.) For more information, see your John Deere dealer.
DX,FUEL10 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-5 020113

PN=81
Maintenance—Machine

Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants


Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
Avoid mixing different brands or types of oils. Oil
lubricant recommendations different from those printed
manufacturers blend base stock and additives to
in this manual. Some John Deere brand coolants and
create their oils and to meet certain specifications and
lubricants may not be available in your location.
performance requirements. Mixing different oils can
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the interfere with proper functioning of these formulations and
performance requirements as shown in this manual. degrade lubricant performance.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in this Consult your authorized John Deere dealer to obtain
manual apply to both conventional and synthetic oils. specific information and recommendations.

Re-refined base stock products may be used if the


finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
AM40430,00000AA -19-03NOV08-1/1

Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil


New engines are filled at the factory with either John
IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50, or
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. During
engine oils meeting any of the following for the
the break-in period, add John Deere Break-In or Break-In
initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
Plus Engine Oil, respectively, as needed to maintain the
specified oil level. API CJ-4 ACEA E9
API CI-4 PLUS ACEA E7
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly
API CI-4 ACEA E6
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine
components properly. API CH-4 ACEA E5
API CG-4 ACEA E4
Change the oil and filter at 250 hours maximum for
API CF-4 ACEA E3
Break-In Oil or 500 hours maximum for Break-In Plus Oil
API CF-2
during the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine.
API CF
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John
Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil. These oils will not allow the engine to
break in properly.
If John Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil is not
available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine oil meeting one of
John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil can be used for all
the following during the first 250 hours of operation:
John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
• API Service Classification CE levels.
• API Service Classification CD After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II, John
• API Service Classification CC Deere Plus-50, or other diesel engine oil as recommended
• ACEA Oil Sequence E2 in this manual.
• ACEA Oil Sequence E1
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
VD76477,0001322 -19-31MAR11-1/1

3-1-6 020113

PN=82
Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II Engines


Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes. 50˚C 122˚F
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred. 40˚C 104˚F
John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended.
30˚C 86˚F

SAE 15W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the

SAE 10W-40
following: 20˚C 68˚F

SAE 10W-30

SAE 0W-40
• John Deere Torq-Gard™ 10˚C 50˚F

SAE 5W-30
• API Service Category CJ-4
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS 0˚C 32˚F
• API Service Category CI-4
• API Service Category CH-4 -10˚C 14˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9

TX1114353 —UN—22MAY12
• ACEA Oil Sequence E7 -20˚C -4˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6
• ACEA Oil Sequence E5 -30˚C -22˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E4
• ACEA Oil Sequence E3 -40˚C -40˚F
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E2 -19-23MAY12-1/1

3-1-7 020113

PN=83
Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine


The oil and filter service intervals in the following table • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.05% (500 ppm)
should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals to 0.50% (5000 ppm) may result in REDUCED oil and
also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It filter change intervals as shown in the table.
is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper than 0.50% (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer.
oil and filter service interval.
IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater
Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination than B20, reduce the oil and filter service
of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based
sulfur content of the diesel fuel. on test results from OILSCAN.
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
Oil types (premium or standard) in the table include:
Standard Drain Oil Pan Extended Drain
Oil Pan • “Premium Oils” include John Deere PLUS-50™, ACEA
Fuel Sulfur Less than 0.05% (500 ppm) E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.
Standard Oil 250 hours 250 hours • “Standard Oils” include John DeereTORQ-GARD
Premium Oil 375 hours 500 hours SUPREME™, API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, API
Fuel Sulfur 0.05 to 0.50% (500 to 5000 ppm)
CH-4, or ACEA E3 oils.
Standard Oil 150 hours 150 hours NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change
Premium Oil 275 hours 400 hours interval is only allowed if all of the following
Fuel Sulfur 0.50% to 1.00% (5000 ppm to 10 000 ppm) conditions are met:
Standard Oil 125 hours 125 hours • Engine equipped with an extended drain
Premium Oil 187 hours 250 hours interval oil pan
Engine oil analysis is required to determine the actual extended service • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
life of premium oils ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4. than 0.05% (500 ppm)
• Use of premium oil: John Deere PLUS-50, ACEA
Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and • Perform engine oil analysis to determine the
filter service intervals as shown in the table. actual extended service life of ACEA E7, ACEA
E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4 oils
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.05% • Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
(500 ppm) is strongly recommended.

PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company


TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E3 -19-16JUL10-1/1

3-1-8 020113

PN=84
Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III A


Engines 50˚C 122˚F

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature 40˚C 104˚F
range during the period between oil changes.
30˚C 86˚F

SAE 15W-40
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred.

SAE 10W-40
John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended. 20˚C 68˚F

SAE 10W-30

SAE 0W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the 10˚C 50˚F

SAE 5W-30
following:
0˚C 32˚F
• John Deere Torq-Gard™
• API Service Category CJ-4 -10˚C 14˚F
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS

TX1114353 —UN—22MAY12
• API Service Category CI-4 -20˚C -4˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9
• ACEA Oil Sequence E7 -30˚C -22˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E6
• ACEA Oil Sequence E5 -40˚C -40˚F
• ACEA Oil Sequence E4
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E4 -19-23MAY12-1/1

3-1-9 020113

PN=85
Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine
The oil and filter service intervals in the following table IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater
should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals than B20, reduce the oil and filter service
also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based
is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual on test results from Oilscan.
useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper
oil and filter service interval. Oil types in the table include:
Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination
of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and
• John Deere Plus-50™ II and John Deere Plus-50
sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
• “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard Supreme™,
API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E9, ACEA
Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and Use of lower specification oils in Tier 3 engines may result
filter service intervals as shown in the table. in premature engine failure.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.10% NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change interval
(1000 mg/kg) is strongly recommended. is only allowed if all the following conditions are met:
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.10% (1000
mg/kg) to 0.50% (5000 mg/kg) may result in REDUCED • Engine equipped with an extended drain
oil and filter change intervals as shown in the table. interval oil pan
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg), contact your John Deere than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg)
dealer. • Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II or John
• DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than Deere Plus-50 oil
1.00% (10 000 mg/kg). • Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A - PowerTech Plus™ U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A - PowerTech™
Oil Pan Size (L/kW) Oil Pan Size (L/kW)
Oil pan capacity Greater than or Greater than or Greater than or Greater than or Greater than or Greater than or Greater than or
equal to 0.10 equal to 0.12 equal to 0.14 equal to 0.22 equal to 0.10 equal to 0.12 equal to 0.14
Fuel Sulfur Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg) Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg)
Plus-50 375 hours 500 hours 500 hours 500 hours 375 hours 500 hours 500 hours
Other Oils 250 hours 250 hours 250 hours 250 hours 250 hours 250 hours 250 hours
Fuel Sulfur 0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg) 0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg)
Plus-50 300 hours 300 hours 500 hours 500 hours 300 hours 400 hours 500 hours
Other Oils 200 hours 200 hours 250 hours 250 hours 200 hours 200 hours 250 hours
Fuel Sulfur 0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg) 0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg)
Plus-50 250 hours 250 hours 300 hours 500 hours 275 hours 350 hours 500 hours
Other Oils 150 hours 150 hours 200 hours 250 hours 150 hours 175 hours 250 hours
Fuel Sulfur 0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg) 0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg)
Plus-50 Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions) 187 hours 250 hours 250 hours
Other Oils Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions) 125 hours 125 hours 125 hours
The service interval of “Other Oils” may be extended only if oil analysis is performed to determine the actual service life, to a maximum not to
exceed that of Plus-50.

Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company


Torq-Gard Supreme is a trademark of Deere & Company
PowerTech Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
PowerTech is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E5 -19-16JUL10-1/1

3-1-10 020113

PN=86
Maintenance—Machine

Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front


Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oils are preferred:
• John Deere HY-GARD™
• John Deere Low Viscosity HY-GARD™
Other oils may be used if they meet one of the following:
• John Deere Standard JDM J20C
• John Deere Standard JDM J20D
Use the following oil when a biodegradable fluid is

TS1660 —UN—10OCT97
required:
• John Deere BIO-HY-GARD™

HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


BIO-HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00010CF -19-17JUL07-1/1

Hydraulic Oil
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oil is preferred:
• John Deere PLUS-50™
The following oil is also recommended:
• John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME™
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
following:
• API Service Classification CH-4

TX1017022 —UN—21DEC06
• API Service Classification CG-4
• API Service Classification CF-4
• ACEA Specification E3
• ACEA Specification E2

PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company


TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00010D0 -19-04APR07-1/1

3-1-11 020113

PN=87
Maintenance—Machine

Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere Moly High Temperature/EP Grease is
preferred.
The following greases are also recommended:
• SAE Multipurpose EP Grease containing 3-5%
molybdenum disulfide
• SAE Multipurpose EP Grease
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not
compatible with others. Consult your grease

TX1075818 —UN—06APR10
supplier before mixing different types of grease.

VD76477,00012D0 -19-19MAY10-1/1

Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant


The engine cooling system is filled to provide year-round heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the
protection against corrosion and cylinder liner pitting, and following chemical and physical properties:
winter freeze protection to -37°C (-34°F). If protection at
lower temperatures is required, consult your John Deere • Is formulated with a quality nitrite-free additive package.
dealer for recommendations. • Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to
either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet
The following engine coolants are preferred: study run at or above 60% load capacity
• John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix • Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix
The additive package must be part of one of the following
Use John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix when a coolant mixtures:
non-toxic coolant formulation is required.
Additional Recommended Coolants
• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted
(40—60%) heavy duty coolant
The following engine coolant is also recommended: • ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy
duty coolant concentrate in a 40—60% mixture of
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40–60% concentrate with quality water
mixture of concentrate with quality water.
Water Quality
John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix, COOL-GARD II PG
Premix, and COOL-GARD II Concentrate coolants do not Water quality is important to the performance of the
require use of supplemental coolant additives. cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
Other Coolants propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
John Deere COOL-GARD II and COOL-GARD II PG IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
coolants might not be available in the geographical area additives or antifreeze that contains
where service is performed. sealing additives.
If these coolants are unavailable, use a coolant Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with glycol base coolants.
Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


DX,COOL3 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-12 020113

PN=88
Maintenance—Machine

Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant


Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the If John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD II
coolant used. PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used, but
the coolant is not tested OR additives are not replenished
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender,
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are the drain interval is four years or 4000 hours of operation.
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 This drain interval only applies to COOL-GARD II coolants
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is that have been maintained within a 40—60% mixture of
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix concentrate with quality water.
or COOL-GARD II PG Premix.
If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II, or COOL-GARD
Test the coolant condition annually with Coolant Test II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to two years or
Strips designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD 2000 hours of operation.
II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive
is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender as directed.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL11 -19-14APR11-1/1

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender

Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
engine operation. For John Deere COOL-GARD™ II additive when the cooling system is drained
Premix, COOL-GARD II PG Premix, and COOL-GARD II and refilled with any of the following:
Concentrate, replenish coolant additives between drain
intervals by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant • John Deere COOL-GARD II
Extender. • John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
be added unless indicated by coolant testing. additives may result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
chemically matched additive system for use with all Add the recommended concentration of John Deere
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use than the recommended amount.
with nitrite-containing coolants.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL16 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-13 020113

PN=89
Maintenance—Machine

Supplemental Coolant Additives


Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during
engine operation. For nitrite-containing coolants,
• John Deere COOL-GARD II
replenish coolant additives between drain intervals by
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
adding a supplemental coolant additive as determined If other coolants are used, consult the coolant supplier
necessary by coolant testing. and follow the manufacturer's recommendation for use of
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is recommended supplemental coolant additives.
as a supplemental coolant additive for nitrite-containing The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
coolants. additives may result in additive drop-out and gelation of
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is not designed the coolant.
for use with John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, Add the manufacturer's recommended concentration of
COOL-GARD II PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II supplemental coolant additive. DO NOT add more than
Concentrate. the recommended amount.
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL4 -19-14APR11-1/1

Operating in Warm Temperature Climates


John Deere engines are designed to operate using glycol IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in
base engine coolants. emergency situations only.
Always use a recommended glycol base engine coolant, Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
even when operating in geographical areas where freeze corrosion, scaling, and cavitation will occur
protection is not required. when water is used as the coolant, even when
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix is available in a coolant conditioners are added.
concentration of 50% ethylene glycol. However, there Drain cooling system and refill with
are situations in warm temperature climates where a recommended glycol base engine coolant
coolant with lower glycol concentration (approximately as soon as possible.
20% ethylene glycol) has been approved. In these cases,
the low glycol formulation has been modified to provide
the same level of corrosion inhibitor as John Deere
COOL-GARD II Premix (50/50).

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


DX,COOL6 -19-03NOV08-1/1

3-1-14 020113

PN=90
Maintenance—Machine

Additional Information About Diesel Engine Coolants and John Deere COOL-GARD™
II Coolant Extender

Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical


components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol Avoid Automotive-type Coolants
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality Never use automotive-type coolants (such as those
water. meeting ASTM D3306). These coolants do not contain the
Coolant Specifications correct additives to protect heavy-duty diesel engines. Do
not treat an automotive engine coolant with supplemental
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix either EG or coolant additives because the high concentration of
PG, are fully formulated coolants that contain all three additives can result in additive fallout.
components in their correct concentrations. DO NOT
add an initial charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II Water Quality
Coolant Extender to COOL-GARD II Premix. DO NOT Water quality is important to the performance of the
add any other supplemental coolant additive or water to cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
COOL-GARD II Premix. water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol
John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate contains both and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.All
ethylene glycol and inhibiting coolant additives. Mix this water used in the cooling system should meet the
product with quality water, but DO NOT add an initial following minimum specifications for quality:
charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender Chlorides <40 mg/L
or any other supplemental coolant additive. Sulfates <100 mg/L

Replenish Coolant Additives Total dissolved solids <340 mg/L


Total hardness <170 mg/L
Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during pH 5.5 to 9.0
engine operation. Periodic replenishment of inhibitors
is required, even when John Deere COOL-GARD II Freeze Protection
Premix or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used. Follow
the recommendations in this manual for the use of John The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
Why use John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Ethylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
Extender? 40% -24°C (-12°F)
50% -37°C (-34°F)
Operating without proper coolant additives will result in
60% -52°C (-62°F)
increased corrosion, cylinder liner erosion and pitting, and
other damage to the engine and cooling system. A simple Propylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
mixture of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol and water 40% -21°C (-6°F)
will not give adequate protection. 50% -33°C (-27°F)
60% -49°C (-56°F)
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a
chemically matched additive system designed to fortify the
proprietary additives used in John Deere COOL-GARD II DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate and to provide ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
optimum protection for up to six years or 6000 hours of
operation.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL17 -19-20APR11-1/1

3-1-15 020113

PN=91
Maintenance—Machine

Testing Diesel Engine Coolant


Maintaining adequate concentrations of glycol and
inhibiting additives in the coolant is critical to protect the Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
engine and cooling system against freezing, corrosion, COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
and cylinder liner erosion and pitting. than the recommended amount.

Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months or less When Using Nitrite-Containing Coolants
and whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or Compare the test strip results to the supplemental coolant
overheating. additive (SCA) chart to determine the amount of inhibiting
Coolant Test Strips additives in your coolant and whether more John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner should be added.
Coolant test strips are available from your John Deere
dealer. These test strips provide a simple, effective Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
method to check the freeze point and additive levels of Liquid Coolant Conditioner. DO NOT add more than the
your engine coolant. recommended amount.

When Using John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Analysis

John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix™ , COOL-GARD For a more thorough evaluation of your coolant, perform a
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are coolant analysis. The coolant analysis can provide critical
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000 data such as freezing point, antifreeze level, pH, alkalinity,
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is nitrite content (cavitation control additive), molybdate
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix content (rust inhibitor additive), silicate content, corrosion
or COOL-GARD II PG premix. Test the coolant condition metals, and visual assessment.
annually with coolant test strips designed for use with Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip coolant analysis.
chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender as directed.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL9 -19-11APR11-1/1

3-1-16 020113

PN=92
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Machine at Specified Intervals
Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at
intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart (A),
greasing maintenance chart (B), and in the maintenance
sections.

T132353B —UN—13JUL00
Perform service on items at multiples of the original
requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service
those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100
hours, and 10 hours or daily.
Intervals shown on charts and in this manual are for
normal conditions. If operating in difficult conditions,
service at shorter intervals.
A—Periodic Maintenance Chart B—Greasing Maintenance
Chart

CED,OUO1079,418 -19-14DEC06-1/1

Check Hour Meter Regularly


Check the hour meter (1) in the display window to
determine when the machine needs periodic maintenance.
To check the hour meter, turn the key switch on and press

TX1013759A —UN—26OCT06
the SELECT button until the hour meter is displayed.
To check the hour meter with the key switch off, press
and hold the SELECT button.

1— Hour Meter

VD76477,00010F9 -19-10JUL09-1/1

Prepare Machine for Maintenance


IMPORTANT: Improperly disposing of waste can loader boom fully to the ground, and move
threaten the environment and ecology. control levers to release hydraulic pressure
Potentially harmful waste used with John before working near the front of the machine.
Deere equipment includes such items as oil, See Loader Boom Service Lock in this section
fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries. for installation instructions.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a
drain, or into any water source. Raise the front loader boom and install the loader boom
service lock before performing maintenance in the engine
Before performing procedures in the maintenance compartment. See Loader Boom Service Lock in this
chapters and before leaving the operator’s seat, park the section.
machine, and release hydraulic pressure.
If the machine is equipped with ride control, discharge
hydraulic pressure from the ride control system before
CAUTION: Prevent serious injury or death from performing maintenance. See Discharge Ride Control
unexpected machine movement. Always install System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped. (Section 4-1.)
the loader boom service lock, or lower the front
CED,OUO1079,419 -19-18JAN02-1/1

3-2-1 020113

PN=93
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Engine Identification
Use the following information to identify the engine as
either a Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage II engine.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine Component Identification
Machines equipped with Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines have
surge tank (1) mounted at rear of engine compartment
and charge air cooler (2) on top right side of engine.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different

TX1035275A —UN—23JAN08
placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier
2/Stage II engines.

1— Surge Tank 3— Muffler


2— Charge Air Cooler 4— Air Cleaner

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (left side view)

TX1035274A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (right side view)

TX1035278A —UN—23JAN08

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (detail)


Continued on next page MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-1/3

3-2-2 020113

PN=94
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Tier 2/Stage II Engine Component Identification


Machines equipped with Tier 2/Stage II engines have
surge tank (1) mounted at front of engine compartment,
and do not use a charge air cooler.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different
placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier
2/Stage II engines.

TX1035276A —UN—23JAN08
1— Surge Tank 4— Air Cleaner
3— Muffler

Tier 2/Stage II Engine (left side view)

TX1035277A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 2/Stage II Engine (right side view)

TX1035279A —UN—23JAN08

Tier 2/Stage II Engine (detail)


Continued on next page MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-2/3

3-2-3 020113

PN=95
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Engine Serial and Model Number Identification


The engine serial number plate (7) is located on the right
rear of the engine block.
The fifth digit of the engine model number can be used to

TX1035401A —UN—23JAN08
identify an engine as either Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage
II based on aspiration method for this machine application.
Engine Model Number
4045HT054 Turbocharger and air-to-water
H ........................................ aftercooled (Tier 3/Stage IIIA
engine)
4045TT095 Turbocharged, no aftercooling
T ......................................... (Tier 2/Stage II engine) Engine Serial Number Plate Location

5— Engine Serial Number 7— Engine Serial Number Plate


6— Engine Model Number

TX1035303 —UN—29JAN08
Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1035305 —UN—29JAN08
Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-3/3

3-2-4 020113

PN=96
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Loader Boom Service Lock


Install loader boom service lock when front loader must 5. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin, and lower loader
be raised for service procedures. boom service lock onto cylinder rod.
IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader 6. Install retaining pin and cotter pin to attach loader
boom while the engine hood is open. Always boom service lock on cylinder rod.
close the engine hood fully before moving
the front loader boom, or severe damage to 7. Slowly lower boom until its weight settles onto the
the engine hood will occur. loader boom service lock.

Installing the Loader Boom Service Lock Removing the Loader Boom Service Lock

1. Close engine hood. 1. Close engine hood.

2. Empty loader bucket and move bucket to dump 2. Start engine and raise boom slightly to allow clearance
position. between loader boom service lock and cylinder.

3. Raise boom until loader boom service lock can fit over 3. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin.
cylinder rod. 4. Lift loader boom service lock to storage position, and
4. Stop engine. install retaining pin and cotter pin to retain.
HG31779,000007D -19-14MAY02-1/1

Opening and Closing Engine Hood

CAUTION: Prevent serious injury or death from


unexpected machine movement. Always install
the loader boom service lock, or lower the front

TX1013942A —UN—23OCT06
loader boom fully to the ground, and move
control levers to release hydraulic pressure
before working near the front of the machine.

IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower front loader boom


while the engine hood is open. Always close
engine hood fully before moving front loader
boom, or severe damage to hood will occur.

NOTE: The engine hood can be partially opened when


the front loader boom is lowered fully to the
ground. To fully open the engine hood, the front
loader boom must be fully raised and the loader

TX1013950A —UN—23OCT06
boom service lock must be installed.

Push hood tilt latch (1) and lift hood to open.


Pull hood support (2) and slowly lower hood to close.

1— Hood Tilt Latch 2— Hood Support

VD76477,0001132 -19-20OCT06-1/1

Fuel Tank To avoid condensation, fill the fuel tank at the end of each
day’s operation. Shut off engine before filling.
CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine
is hot or running, DO NOT fill the fuel tank. Specification
DO NOT smoke while filling fuel tank or Fuel Tank—Capacity....................................................................... 155 L
working on fuel system. 41 gal

VD76477,00011F7 -19-07MAR07-1/1

3-2-5 PN=97
020113
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way


Coolant Test Kit
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant
Test Kit are John Deere fluid sampling products to help you

TX1003513A —UN—20FEB06
monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The
objective of a fluid sampling program is to ensure machine
availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by
identifying potential problems before they become critical.
Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples
should be taken from each system on a periodic basis,
usually prior to a filter and/or fluid change interval. Certain
systems require more frequent sampling. Consult your Fluid Analysis Kits
authorized John Deere dealer on a maintenance program
for your specific application. Your authorized John Deere
dealer has the sampling products and expertise to assist
you in lowering your overall operating costs through fluid
sampling.
AM40430,00002FE -19-19OCT11-1/1

3-2-6 020113

PN=98
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Service Intervals
Model: 310J and 310SJ PIN/Serial Number:
Hour Meter Reading:

SERVICE INTERVALS
Service your machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500
hours also service those items listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
FLUID SAMPLING
Take fluid samples from each system as indicated on this form. The manufacturer of the fluid analysis kits will provide maintenance
recommendations based upon the results of the fluid analysis and the operating information you supply. Regular fluid sampling extends the
operational life of your machine.

As Required
□ Inspect tires and check pressure □ Clean or replace engine air cleaner elements
□ Check wheel fasteners □ Grease MFWD drive shaft spline (if equipped)
□ Clean or replace cab fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped) □ Grease non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)
□ Drain water and sediment from water separators □ Add coolant extender as indicated by COOL-GARD™ II test strips
□ Drain water and sediment from auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped)

Every 10 Hours or Daily


□ Check hydraulic reservoir oil level □ Grease backhoe boom, crowd cylinders and pivots
□ Check engine oil level □ Grease backhoe bucket cylinder and pivots
□ Check coolant level □ Grease backhoe swing cylinder and pivots
□ Inspect fuel water sediment bowls □ Grease MFWD front axle and U-joints (if equipped)
□ Grease loader pivot points □ Grease non-powered front axle steering pivots (if equipped)
□ Grease loader quick coupler (if equipped) □ Grease multipurpose bucket pivots (if equipped)
□ Grease front axle pivot pin □ Grease backhoe coupler (if equipped)
□ Grease stabilizer pivots and cylinder pins

Every 50 Hours
□ Check transmission oil level □ Grease backhoe coupler fittings (if equipped)

Initial Service—250 Hours1


□ Change engine break-in oil and replace filter
1
Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.

Every 250 Hours


□ Check MFWD planetary housing oil level (if equipped) □ Check rear axle oil level
□ Check MFWD front axle housing oil level (if equipped) □ Take engine oil sample
□ Check battery electrolyte level and tighten terminals

Every 500 Hours


□ Check air intake hose □ Clean engine crankcase vent tube
□ Check boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque □ Take rear axle oil sample
□ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank □ Take diesel fuel sample
□ Change engine oil and replace filter □ Take transmission oil sample
□ Replace fuel filters □ Take hydraulic oil sample
□ Replace auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped) □ Take engine coolant sample

Every 1000 Hours


□ Replace hydraulic reservoir breather □ Replace hydraulic oil filter
□ Replace engine air cleaner elements □ Replace fuel breather
□ Replace cab, fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped) □ Change transmission oil and replace filter
□ Inspect serpentine belt □ Check coolant

Continued on next page CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-1/2

3-2-7 020113

PN=99
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

□ Clean, pack, and adjust non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)

Every 2000 Hours


□ Adjust engine valve lash □ Drain and refill hydraulic reservoir oil
□ Drain and refill MFWD front axle housing oil (if equipped) □ Drain and refill rear axle and planetary oil
□ Drain and refill MFWD planetary housing oil (if equipped) □ Inspect and clean hydraulic reservoir fill screen

Every 6000 Hours


□ Drain and refill cooling system

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-2/2

3-2-8 020113

PN=100
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Required Parts
REQUIRED PARTS
Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine John Deere parts. Verify part numbers are current and that any associated
parts are also on hand, i.e., filter O-rings.
Initial
Every Every Every Every Every
Part Service1 -
Description 250 500 1000 2000 6000
Number 250
Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours
Hours
Engine Oil Filter RE504836 1 1 1 1 1
Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel Filter (if AT365870 1 1 1 1
equipped)
Hydraulic Oil Filter AT308274 1 1 1
Hydraulic Reservoir Breather AT101565 1 1 1
Fuel Breather AM107314 1 1 1
Transmission Oil Filter AT179323 1 1 1
Cab Fresh Air Filter AT191102 1 1 1
Cab Recirculation Filter AT184590 1 1 1
Engine 4045DT054
• Primary Fuel Filter RE529643 1 1 1 1
• Final Fuel Filter RE522878 1 1 1 1
• Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket R524468 1 1
• Air Filter Element―Primary AT332908 As Required
• Air Filter Element―Secondary AT332909 As Required
• Engine Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve T179504 As Required
Engine 4045DT060
• Final Fuel Filter RE509031 1 1 1 1
• Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket R123542 1 1
• Air Filter Element―Primary KV16429 As Required
• Air Filter Element―Secondary AT171854 As Required
• Engine Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve R48568 As Required
Engine 4045TT094
• Final Fuel Filter RE509031 1 1 1 1
• Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket R524480 1 1
• Air Filter Element―Primary KV16429 As Required
• Air Filter Element―Secondary AT171854 As Required
• Engine Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve R48568 As Required
COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix:
Tier 2/Stage II Engine TY26575 21.0 L
(5.5 gal.)
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine TY26575 25.0 L
(6.6 gal.)
Coolant Extender TY26603 As Required
John Deere PLUS-50™ II Engine Oil TY266742 13.0 L 13.0 L 13.0 L 13.0 L 13.0 L
(3.5 gal.) (3.5 gal.) (3.5 gal.) (3.5 gal.) (3.5 gal.)
John Deere PLUS-50™ Hydraulic Oil TY63892 39.0 L 39.0 L
(10.3 gal.) (10.3 gal.)
HY-GARD™ Transmission Oil:
Transmission Oil TY63542 15.0 L 15.0 L 15.0 L
(4.0 gal.) (4.0 gal.) (4.0 gal.)
MFWD Front Axle Housing and Planetary Oil TY63542 8.5 L 8.5 L
(if equipped) (2.25 gal.) (2.25 gal.)
Rear Axle Housing and Planetary Oil TY63542 18.0 L 18.0 L
(4.8 gal.) (4.8 gal.)
Fluid Analysis Kits3
Diesel Engine Oil AT346594 1 1 1 1 1
Continued on next page CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-1/2

3-2-9 020113

PN=101
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Initial
Every Every Every Every Every
Part Service1 -
Description 250 500 1000 2000 6000
Number 250
Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours
Hours
Hydraulic Oil AT346594 1 1 1 1
Transmission and Rear Axle Oil AT346594 2 2 2 2
Diesel Fuel AT180344 1 1 1 1
Engine Coolant TY26873 1 1 1 1
COOL-GARD™ II Test Strips TY26605 1 1 1
1
Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.
2
For recommended oil type and oil viscosities based on operating temperatures see Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)
3
Based on fluid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for your operating conditions. Consult your local John Deere dealer.

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-2/2

3-2-10 020113

PN=102
Maintenance—As Required
Check Tire Pressure
CAUTION: Explosive separation of a tire and rim
parts can cause serious injury or death.
Only attempt to mount a tire if you have the
proper equipment and experience to perform
the job. Have it done by your John Deere
dealer or a qualified repair service.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. DO
NOT inflate the tires above the recommended
pressure. NEVER cut or weld on an inflated tire
or rim assembly, rim, or rim parts. Heat from
welding could cause an increase in pressure
and may result in a tire explosion.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and
extension hose long enough to allow you to stand
to one side and NOT in front of or over the tire
assembly. Use a safety cage if available.
Inspect tires and wheels daily. DO NOT operate
with low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged

TS211 —UN—23AUG88
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.

Check tire pressure with an accurate gauge having 6.9


kPa (0.07 bar) (1 psi) graduations. If tires contain liquid
ballast, use a special air-water gauge and measure with
valve stem at bottom.
When inflating tires be sure to lock air chuck to valve stem
and stand to front or rear of tire.
TX,55,BD2138 -19-07OCT96-1/1

3-3-1 020113

PN=103
Maintenance—As Required

Front Axle
Tire Inflation Pressures
Tire Size Pressure
Shipping pressure may not be the same as operating 372 kPa
pressure. You may change tire pressures to suit 10.5/80-18 3.7 bar
working condition according to tire manufacturer’s 54 psi
recommendations. 303 kPa
11L-15 3.0 bar
IMPORTANT: The tire pressure stamped on the 44 psi
sidewall of a tire is the manufacturers 441 kPa
recommended pressure for that specific tire. 11L-16 4.4 bar
If there is a pressure difference between the 64 psi
sidewall stamp and the chart below use the 414 kPa
pressure listed below. The pressures below 12.5/80-18 12PR 4.1 bar
have been approved by the tire manufacturer. 60 psi
The pressure difference on these tires may be 414 kPa
to alleviate tire squat, improve stability, and 12.5/80-18 10PR 4.1 bar
60 psi
or prevent premature tire failure.
345 kPa
12-16.5 8PR 3.4 bar
NOTE: Some or of these tires options may not be 50 psi
available on specific backhoe models. 276 kPa
12-16.5 10PR R-3 2.8 bar
40 psi
448 kPa
12-16.5 10PR SS
4.5 bar
12-16.5 10PR NHS
65 psi
276 kPa
14.5/75-16.1 2.8 bar
40 psi
276 kPa
15-19.5 2.8 bar
40 psi
276 kPa
16.5L-16.1 2.8 bar
40 psi
276 kPa
340/80R18 IT530
2.8 bar
(310SJ and 310SJ TMC only)
40 psi
317 kPa
340/80R18 IT530 3.2 bar
46 psi
400 kPa
340/80R18 XMCL 4.0 bar
58 psi
448 kPa
LT245/75R16 4.5 bar
65 psi
Tire Inflation Pressures

Continued on next page TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-1/2

3-3-2 020113

PN=104
Maintenance—As Required

Rear Axle
Tire Size Pressure
16.9-28 193 kPa
(310J, 310SJ and 310SJ TMC 1.9 bar
only) 28 psi
221 kPa
16.9-28 2.2 bar
32 psi
165 kPa
19.5L-24 10PR R-3 1.7 bar
24 psi
193 kPa
19.5L-24 10PR R-4 1.9 bar
28 psi
234 kPa
19.5L-24 12PR 2.3 bar
34 psi
179 kPa
19.5L-244 10PR 1.8 bar
26 psi
276 kPa
19.5L-244 16PR 2.8 bar
40 psi
248 kPa
19.5L-249 2.5 bar
36 psi
241 kPa
20.5-25 12PR L-2 2.4 bar
35 psi
248 kPa
20.5-25 12PR L-3 2.5 bar
36 psi
427 kPa
20.5-25 XTLA 4.3 bar
62 psi
179 kPa
21L-24 10PR 1.8 bar
26 psi
234 kPa
21L-24 12PR 2.3 bar
34 psi
248 kPa
21L-28 2.5 bar
36 psi
317 kPa
500/70R24 IT530 3.2 bar
46 psi
317 kPa
500/70R24 XMCL 3.2 bar
46 psi
317 kPa
540/70R24 3.2 bar
46 psi
Tire Inflation Pressures
TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-2/2

3-3-3 020113

PN=105
Maintenance—As Required

Check Wheel Fasteners


IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Fasteners should be clean and dry. Do not
lubricate fasteners. Start fasteners by hand
to prevent cross threading.

TX1044696A —UN—25JUN08
Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour
intervals until torque is maintained.

Check front and rear wheel fasteners (1 and 2) according


to specification.
1. Inspect all parts for damage. Replace parts as
necessary. 315SJ Shown

2. When replacing clean lug nuts and tapped studs. Use


1— Front Wheel Fastener (8 2— Rear Wheel Fastener (10
compressed air to dry all parts. used per tire) used per tire)
3. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern until wheel is drawn
up to hub.
Non-Powered Front
4. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern to full torque. Wheel-to-Hub Cap
Screws
5. Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour intervals
(11L x 16 Tire Size)
until torque is maintained.
—Torque..................................................................................... 126 N•m
170 lb.-ft
Non-Powered Front
Specification
Wheel-to-Hub Cap
Rear Wheel
Screws
Nuts—Torque............................................................................. 725 N•m
(14.5/75 -16.1 Tire
535 lb.-ft
Size)—Torque............................................................................. 290 N•m
MFWD Front Wheel-to-
214 lb.-ft
Hub Nuts—Torque...................................................................... 725 N•m
535 lb.-ft
KR46761,0000796 -19-31OCT12-1/1

Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped


Cab Fresh Air Filter
1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.
2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.

T132588B —UN—18JUL00
3. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if
damaged.
4. Install filter and filter cover.
5. Close latch.

A—Latch B—Fresh Air Filter Cover

Continued on next page VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-1/2

3-3-4 PN=106
020113
Maintenance—As Required

Cab Recirculating Air Filter


1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab
recirculating air filter.
2. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if
damaged.

T132838B —UN—24JUL00
3. Install filter and filter cover.
Cleaning Cab Air Filters

CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than


210 kPa (2.10 bar) (30 psi) when using for
cleaning purposes. Clear area of bystanders,
guard against flying debris, and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection. C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter
Cover
NOTE: Always replace damaged air filters.

Clean filter(s) using one of the following methods: • Tap filter(s) on a flat surface with dirty side down.
• Wash in warm, soapy water and flush. Let filter(s) dry
• Direct compressed air through filter(s), opposite normal before reinstalling.
air flow.
VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-2/2

3-3-5 020113

PN=107
Maintenance—As Required

Drain Water and Sediment from Water


Separator
1. Place container under primary fuel filter drain valve
(1) to collect waste.
2. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain
from fuel filter assembly.
3. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.
4. Place container under final fuel filter drain valve (2) to
collect waste. (Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine only).
5. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain
from fuel filter assembly.
6. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.

TX1036491A —UN—08FEB08
1— Primary Fuel Filter Drain 2— Final Fuel Filter Drain Valve
Valve

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1002482A —UN—10JAN06
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,000013F -19-20FEB09-1/1

Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel 1 2


Filter—If Equipped
1. Place container under drain hose (4).
2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (3). Drain water,
fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste
properly.
3
3. Tighten drain valve.
4. Bleed fuel system with fuel priming pump button (1) 4
until air is vented.
5. Tighten air vent.
TX1054638 —UN—19JAN09

6. Operate engine and check for leaks.

1— Fuel Priming Pump Button 3— Drain Valve


(hand operated) 4— Drain Hose
2— Air Vent

MD04263,0000140 -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-3-6 020113

PN=108
Maintenance—As Required

Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier


3/Stage IIIA Engine
1. Open engine hood.
2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).

TX1035630A —UN—01FEB08
3. Remove primary element (2).
IMPORTANT: A damaged or dirty element may
cause engine damage.
Install a new primary element:
1. If the element shows damage.
2. If element will not clean.
3. After 1000 hours service or annually.
Install a new secondary element (3):
1. If the primary element is damaged and

TX1035631A —UN—01FEB08
needs to be replaced.
2. If the element is visibly dirty.
3. After 1000 hours service or annually.
DO NOT clean a secondary element. Install a
new element carefully centering it in the canister.

4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter


restriction indicator is lit, see Inspecting and Cleaning
Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that

TX1035632A —UN—01FEB08
has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken
or missing, install a new element.

1— Clip (3 used) 3— Secondary Element


2— Primary Element

MD04263,000011E -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-3-7 020113

PN=109
Maintenance—As Required

Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier


2/Stage II Engine
1. Open engine hood.
2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).

T159080B —UN—04SEP02
3. Remove primary element (2).
IMPORTANT: A damaged or dirty element may
cause engine damage.
Install a new primary element:
1. If the element shows damage.
2. If element will not clean.
3. After 1000 hours service or annually.
Install a new secondary element (3):
1. If the primary element is damaged and
needs to be replaced.

T159081B —UN—04SEP02
2. If the element is visibly dirty.
3. After 1000 hours service or annually.
DO NOT clean a secondary element. Install a
new element carefully centering it in the canister.

4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter


restriction indicator is lit, See Inspecting and Cleaning
Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that
has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken

T159082B —UN—04SEP02
or missing, install a new element.

1— Clip (3 used) 3— Secondary Element


2— Primary Element

MD04263,000011F -19-07JUL09-1/1

Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If


Equipped
IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used
in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.
T125640B —UN—08NOV99

Apply grease to lubrication fitting (1) until it escapes from


joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

1— Lubrication Fitting

CED,TX03768,2667 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-3-8 020113

PN=110
Maintenance—As Required

Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel


Bearings—If Equipped
IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used
in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.

T164479B —UN—27JAN03
1. Remove plug and install lubrication fitting.
2. Grease with approximately five low pressure strokes
of grease. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)
3. Remove lubrication fitting and install plug.

VD76477,00010F1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-3-9 020113

PN=111
Maintenance—As Required

Check Coolant
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
pressurized cooling system can cause
serious burns.
Remove surge tank cap only when engine is

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
cold or when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.

IMPORTANT: John Deere COOL-GARD™ II


Coolant Extender does not protect against
freezing. Coolant extender prevents rust,
scale, and liner cavitation.

NOTE: Check coolant every 1000 hours or 1 year,


or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant. Add
coolant extender as necessary.

TX1035875A —UN—01FEB08
1. Remove surge tank cap (1) and test coolant solution.
Use one of the following kits to check coolant.
• 3-Way Heavy Duty Coolant Test Kit
Coolant test strips provide an effective method to
check freeze point and additive levels of engine
coolant. See your authorized dealer for 3-Way Heavy
Duty Coolant Test Kit and follow instructions on kit. Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
• COOLSCAN PLUS™
For a more thorough evaluation of coolant, perform
COOLSCAN PLUS analysis, where available.
See your authorized dealer for information about
COOLSCAN PLUS.

TX1014056A —UN—25OCT06
2. Add John Deere COOL-GARD Coolant Extender
as necessary. Follow instructions on container for
amount.
Specification
Tier 3/Stage IIIA
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 25 L
6.6 gal
Tier 2/Stage II Tier 2/Stage II Engine
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 21 L
5.5 gal
1— Surge Tank Cap
3. Install surge tank cap.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
COOLSCAN PLUS is a trademark of Deere & Company
MD04263,0000350 -19-07MAY09-1/1

3-3-10 020113

PN=112
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
NOTE: Check hydraulic oil level with machine parked
on a level surface. Check before starting engine,
with backhoe and stabilizers in transport position,
and front loader bucket lowered to ground.

T163385B —UN—02JAN03
Check when oil is cool.
Sight glass decal has a scale for proper level of oil.

1. Stop engine. Allow time for hydraulic oil to cool.


2. Check oil level in sight glass (1). Oil level should be in
mid-range of decal.

1— Sight Glass

MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-1/2

Adding Oil to the Hydraulic Reservoir


1. If oil is below operating range in ADD range, remove
fill cap (B) and add oil.
2. Install fill cap.

TX1035639A —UN—05FEB08
B—Fill Cap

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

T131716D —UN—13JUL00
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-2/2

3-4-1 020113

PN=113
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Engine Oil Level


IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.
DO NOT run engine when oil level is
below the ADD mark.

TX1035641A —UN—01FEB08
The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when
engine is cold before operation.
1. Park machine on a level surface. Engage park brake.

CAUTION: Prevent serious injury or death from


unexpected machine movement. Always install
the loader boom service lock, or lower the front Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
loader boom fully to the ground, and move
control levers to release hydraulic pressure
before working near the front of the machine.

2. Raise front loader boom and install loader boom


service lock.

TX1035651A —UN—01FEB08
3. Stop engine.
4. Fully open engine hood.
5. Remove engine oil dipstick (1) and check oil level.
BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: Engine is full
when oil level is within cross-hatched area (3). It is
acceptable to run engine as long as oil level is above Tier 2/Stage II Engine
the ADD mark.
AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow oil to 3
drain into oil pan for 10 minutes before checking the
oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown, oil level must ADD FULL
be above the ADD mark.

TX1035644 —UN—29JAN08
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (2) and add oil as necessary.
See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
7. Check oil level and add oil as necessary.
8. Close engine hood.

1— Engine Oil Dipstick 3— Cross-Hatched Area


2— Engine Oil Fill Cap

MD04263,0000143 -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-4-2 020113

PN=114
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Coolant Level


CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying coolant. Remove surge tank cap only
when cool enough to touch with bare hands.
Then loosen cap slowly to stop so pressure is
released from system before removing cap.

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
1. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MAX
COLD and MIN COLD marks on coolant surge tank (1).
2. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to
surge tank.
3. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks and repair as
necessary. Add coolant at surge tank cap. See Diesel
Engine Coolant. (Section 3-1.)

1— Coolant Surge Tank

TX1035648A —UN—01FEB08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1014056A —UN—25OCT06
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000144 -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-4-3 020113

PN=115
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls


Inspect bowls for contaminants.
For draining procedure see Drain Water and Sediment
from Water Separators. (Section 3-3.)

1— Final Fuel Filter Sediment 3— Primary Fuel Filter


Bowl Sediment Bowl
2— Auxiliary Fuel Filter
Sediment Bowl—If
Equipped

TX1058014A —UN—03APR09
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

TX1058015A —UN—03APR09

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

MB60223,00000ED -19-23APR09-1/1

3-4-4 020113

PN=116
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Loader Pivots


NOTE: Machines equipped with synthetic bushings
do not require lubrication.

Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from

TX1002222A —UN—06JAN06
joints. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

6 Points—Left Side Shown

TX1007733A —UN—16MAY06
5 Points

T132372B —UN—12SEP00

2 Points—Left Side Shown

VD76477,00010EC -19-10JUL09-1/1

3-4-5 020113

PN=117
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If


Equipped
Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joints. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

T132372C —UN—12SEP00
4 Points—Left Side Shown

CED,OUO1079,581 -19-03JUN09-1/1

Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins


Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

T132374B —UN—13JUL00
4 points—Left Side Shown

OUO1079,000025C -19-16APR02-1/1

3-4-6 020113

PN=118
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd Cylinders and Pivots

TX1057266A —UN—18MAR09
T131781C —UN—07NOV00
3 Points—Optional Cab Shown 2 Points

Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from


joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

TX1057269A —UN—18MAR09
3 Points—Right Side Shown

MD04263,00002F9 -19-18MAR09-1/1

3-4-7 020113

PN=119
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots


Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

TX1081740A —UN—09SEP10
1 Point

TX1082253A —UN—27SEP10
6 Points - Right Side Shown

MD04263,00002FA -19-27SEP10-1/1

Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots


Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

TX1059262A —UN—07MAY09

8 Points—Right Side Shown

MD04263,00003E3 -19-13MAY09-1/1

3-4-8 020113

PN=120
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped


Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joints. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

T206365A —UN—20DEC04
2 Points—Left Side Shown

HG31779,000005F -19-20DEC06-1/1

Grease Non-Powered Front Axle Steering


Pivots—If Equipped
Apply grease to lubrication fittings on steering pivots until
it escapes from joints.
See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

T163182B —UN—20DEC02
4 Points—Left Side Shown

MD04263,0000351 -19-16APR09-1/1

Grease MFWD Front Axle and Universal


Joints—If Equipped
Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joint.
T132373C —UN—17SEP02

See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

4 Points—Left Side Shown

HG31779,00001DA -19-24JAN03-1/1

3-4-9 020113

PN=121
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical


Jack—If Equipped
Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes
from the joint.

TX1022469A —UN—23APR07
2 Points

MD04263,0000352 -19-03APR09-1/1

Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin


Apply two pumps of grease to lubrication fitting on right
side of frame to lubricate axle oscillating pivot.
See Grease. (Section 3-1.)

TX1013841A —UN—19OCT06
1 Point

VD76477,0001116 -19-22JUL09-1/1

3-4-10 020113

PN=122
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
Check Transmission Oil Level
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Never rely on
transmission control lever (TCL) and gearshift

TX1035656A —UN—01FEB08
lever to keep machine from moving. Always
engage park brake to hold machine.

1. Run engine for 3 minutes to warm transmission oil.


Park machine on a level surface. Move transmission
control lever (TCL) to NEUTRAL. Engage park brake.
2. With engine running at slow idle, turn handle of
transmission dipstick (1) counterclockwise and Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
remove.
NOTE: Normal hot oil can be above full mark.

3. Check oil level on dipstick. If oil is not within


operating range, add oil through dipstick tube. See

TX1035657A —UN—01FEB08
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)
4. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise
to tighten.

1— Transmission Dipstick

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000145 -19-07JUL09-1/1

Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If


Equipped
Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes
from the joint.

TX1022471A —UN—23APR07
1 Point Each Side—Left Side Shown

MD04263,00003A9 -19-22APR09-1/1

3-5-1 020113

PN=123
Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours
Change Engine Break-In Oil and Replace
Filter
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Never rely on

TX1035717A —UN—04FEB08
transmission control lever (TCL) and gearshift
lever to keep machine from moving. Always
engage park brake to hold machine.

1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level


surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.
2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain
into a container. Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter


(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean
mounting surfaces of base as necessary. Dispose of
waste oil properly.

TX1035718A —UN—01FEB08
4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new engine
oil filter, and install by turning new filter clockwise by
hand until gasket touches mounting surface. Torque
an additional 1/2—3/4 turn with filter wrench.
5. Install engine oil drain plug.
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to
specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
Specification
Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L
3.5 gal

IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter


change, crank engine for 10 seconds without

TX1035731A —UN—01FEB08
starting to fill new engine oil filter and
pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.

7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check


for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as
necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil
Level. (Section 3-4.)
Tier 2/Stage II Engine
1— Engine Oil Drain Plug 3— Engine Oil Fill Cap
2— Engine Oil Filter TX1035729A —UN—01FEB08

Tier 2/Stage II Engine


MD04263,0000146 -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-6-1 020113

PN=124
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If
Equipped
1. Rotate housing until OIL LEVEL line (B) is horizontal
and fill plug (A) is above line as shown.
NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to

T105325 —UN—21NOV96
fill to proper level.

2. Remove plug and check that oil is filled to bottom of


plug hole.
3. Add oil to plug hole if necessary. See Transmission,
Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Oil. (Section 3-1.)
4. Install plug. A—MFWD Planetary Housing B—Oil Level Line
Oil Fill Plug
5. Repeat procedure for opposite side wheel.
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,000127B -19-09JUL09-1/1

Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped


1. Remove plug (1) to check oil level. Oil should be filled
to bottom of plug.
NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to

TX1002262A —UN—06JAN06
fill to proper level.

2. Add oil, as necessary, through plug hole. See


Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)
3. Install plug.

1— Plug

HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


VD76477,000127C -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-7-1 020113

PN=125
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Battery Electrolyte Level and


Terminals
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
NEVER check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp
first and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when

TS203 —UN—23AUG88
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 quarts).
Get medical attention immediately.
3. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Remove battery box cover.
1. Do not induce vomiting.
Continued on next page TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-1/3

3-7-2 020113

PN=126
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during


freezing weather, batteries must be charged
after water is added to prevent batteries from
freezing. Charge battery using a battery
charger or by running the engine.

T6996DB —UN—10FEB89
2. Fill each cell to within specified range with distilled
water. DO NOT overfill.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS


remove grounded (—) battery clamp first
and replace it last.

3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp first.

A—Battery Post C—Electrolyte Level Range


B—Fill Tube

T6996DA —UN—10FEB89
TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-2/3

4. Clean battery terminals (A) and clamps with a stiff


brush.
5. Apply lubricating grease (B) around battery terminal
base only.
6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.

T6758AA —UN—21OCT88
TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-3/3

3-7-3 020113

PN=127
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Rear Axle Oil Level


NOTE: If the backhoe has been run in high-speed
transport, wait 30 minutes for the axle oil level
to stabilize before checking oil.

TX1021377A —UN—30MAR07
1. Move machine onto level ground.
2. Remove rear axle oil level plug (1). Oil should run out
of plug hole if the oil level is correct.
3. If oil level is not correct, add oil as necessary. See
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)
4. Install plug.
1— Rear Axle Oil Level Plug

VD76477,00014E9 -19-11APR07-1/1

Take Engine Oil Sample


See your authorized dealer.
MB60223,00000E5 -19-11MAR09-1/1

3-7-4 020113

PN=128
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Check Air Intake Hose
1. Check engine air intake hose (A) for cracks and
replace as necessary.
2. Check for loose connections and tighten hose clamps

TX1035788A —UN—01FEB08
as necessary.

A—Engine Air Intake Hose

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

T132459B —UN—13JUL00
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000147 -19-20FEB09-1/1

Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque


Check torque on the backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pivot
pin bolt (A). Torque the cap screw to specification.
Specification
Backhoe Boom-to-

T133574B —UN—30AUG00
Dipperstick Pivot Pin
Bolt—Torque................................................................................620 N·m
460 lb-ft

A—Backhoe Boom-to-
Dipperstick Pivot Pin Bolt

CED,OUO1079,443 -19-14DEC06-1/1

3-8-1 020113

PN=129
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment


CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine
is hot or running, DO NOT drain fuel tank.
DO NOT smoke while draining fuel tank or

TX1014055A —UN—25OCT06
working on fuel system.

NOTE: To ensure that all of the water drains properly,


use the right stabilizer to lift the right rear
wheel off of the ground.

NOTE: Dispose of waste properly.

1. Loosen sediment drain plug (1) on front of fuel tank


and allow fuel to flow for several seconds. 1— Sediment Drain Plug
2. Tighten plug securely to stop fuel flow.
MD04263,000011D -19-18FEB09-1/1

3-8-2 020113

PN=130
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter


IMPORTANT: If fuel sulfur content exceeds 0.5 percent,
change engine oil at 1/2 the normal interval.

1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level

TX1035717A —UN—04FEB08
surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.
2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain
into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter
(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean
mounting surfaces of base as necessary.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new filter, and
turn new filter clockwise by hand until gasket touches
mounting surface. Torque an additional 1/2—3/4 turn
with filter wrench.
5. Install engine oil drain plug.

TX1035718A —UN—01FEB08
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to
specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Install cap.
Specification
Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L
3.5 gal

IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
change, crank engine for 10 seconds without
starting to fill new engine oil filter and
pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.

7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check


for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as

TX1035731A —UN—01FEB08
necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil
Level. (Section 3-4.)

1— Engine Oil Drain Plug 3— Engine Oil Fill Cap


2— Engine Oil Filter

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

TX1035729A —UN—01FEB08

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000148 -19-23FEB09-1/1

3-8-3 020113

PN=131
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Replace Primary and Final Fuel Filters—Tier


3/Stage IIIA Engine
NOTE: Dispose of waste properly.

1. Thoroughly clean primary and final fuel filters, water


separator assembly, and surrounding area.
2. Turn retaining ring (1) counterclockwise and remove
primary fuel filter element (2).
3. Disconnect water-in-fuel sensor (9).
4. Turn retaining ring (7) counterclockwise and remove
final fuel filter element (8).

TX1036474A —UN—08FEB08
5. Remove water separator bowl (3) from primary fuel
filter. Drain and clean separator bowl.
6. Install water separator bowl onto new primary fuel filter
element. Tighten securely.
NOTE: The fuel filter must be indexed properly and
the key on canister must be oriented in slot of
mounting base for correct installation.

7. Clean filter base (4) and thoroughly inspect filter base


seal ring. Replace as needed.
NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.

TX10022310A —UN—06JAN06
8. Install new primary and final fuel elements by aligning
vertical locators (6) into slots (5) on filter base. Push
filter elements up firmly until filter snaps against base.
9. Turn retaining ring clockwise onto filter base until
retaining ring clicks tightly into place.
10. Connect water-in-fuel sensor.
11. To prime the fuel system turn the key switch to the ON
1— Retaining Ring 6— Vertical Locators
position and wait 60 seconds. 2— Primary Fuel Filter Element 7— Retaining Ring
3— Water Separator Bowl 8— Final Fuel Filter Element
4— Filter Base 9— Water-in-Fuel Sensor
5— Slots 10— Bleed Screw

MD04263,0000123 -19-18FEB09-1/1

3-8-4 020113

PN=132
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine


NOTE: Dispose of waste properly.

1. Turn retaining ring (1) counterclockwise and remove


filter element (2). Allow sediment to drain into a

TX1002309A —UN—06JAN06
container.
2. Remove water separator assembly (3) from old filter
element. Drain and clean separator assembly. Install
assembly on new filter element.
3. Clean filter base (4).
NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.

4. Install new fuel element by aligning vertical locators


(5) into slots (6) on filter base. Push filter element up
firmly until filter snaps against base.

TX10022310A —UN—06JAN06
5. Turn retaining ring clockwise into filter base until
retaining ring clicks tightly into place.
6. Loosen bleed screw (7) by turning knob
counterclockwise.
7. Operate primer lever (8) until fuel flow from bleed
screw is free of air bubbles.
NOTE: If there is no fuel flow, push primer lever toward
engine and turn crankshaft using starter motor to
reposition camshaft. Repeat step 7. 1— Retaining Ring 5— Slots
2— Filter Element 6— Vertical Locators
3— Water Separator Assembly 7— Bleed Screw
8. Tighten bleed screw. 4— Filter Base 8— Primer Lever
9. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.
MD04263,0000124 -19-20FEB09-1/1

Replace Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel 1 2


Filter—If Equipped
1. Place container under drain hose (6). 3
2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (5). Drain water,
fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste 4
properly.
5
3. Tighten drain valve.
4. Disconnect water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor (7). 6
5. Remove glass bowl (4).
6. Remove and replace filter element (3).
7 TX1054639 —UN—19JAN09
7. Install glass bowl.
8. Remove trapped air from fuel filter by using air vent
and priming hand pump (1).
9. Connect WIF sensor.
10. Start engine and let it run for 1 minute. Check for leaks.
11. If needed, tighten filter element and glass bowl only
enough to stop leaks.

1— Priming Hand Pump 5— Drain Valve


2— Air Vent 6— Drain Hose
3— Filter Element 7— Water-In-Fuel (WIF) Sensor
4— Glass Bowl

OU90V02,0000160 -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-8-5 020113

PN=133
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation


Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.

A—Vent Tube

T105323 —UN—21NOV96
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000127 -19-20FEB09-1/1

Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation


Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.

TX1035877A —UN—01FEB08
A—Vent Tube

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

MD04263,0000125 -19-20FEB09-1/1

Take Fluid Samples • Transmission Oil


See your authorized dealer for taking the following fluid
• Rear Axle Oil
samples:
• Engine Coolant
• Diesel Fuel
• Hydraulic Oil
MD04263,000035C -19-15APR09-1/1

3-8-6 020113

PN=134
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped

5
1
2 6
7 9
8

T158732 —UN—23AUG02
10
4

T158732

1— Seal Ring 4— O-Ring 8— Cap Screw (3 used) 10— Wheel Hub Cover Plug
2— Bearing Cone 5— Stud 9— Wheel Hub Cover
3— Wheel Hub 6— Bearing Cone
7— Thrust Washer

1. Raise machine and install jack stands so front wheels 8. Clean all dirt and grease from bearings, spindle and
are off ground. hub assembly.

CAUTION: Prevent injury from falling components. 9. Inspect grease seals for damage or hardened lips and
Secure wheel hub (3) with a lift strap before replace as necessary.
removing any components. 10. Pack bearings and coat seal lips with John Deere
Multi-Purpose Grease or equivalent.
2. Remove wheel.
11. Install bearing cone (2) on spindle using a hammer
3. Remove wheel hub cover plug (10) and remove wheel and driver.
hub cover (9) using wedges. Remove and inspect
O-ring (4), replace if necessary. 12. Install wheel hub (3) on spindle.
4. Remove three cap screws (8) and thrust washer (7). 13. Install bearing cone (6) to hub and spindle.
5. Remove wheel bearing (6). 14. Apply TY9371 LOCTITE® to cap screws (8). Position
thrust washer (7) on spindle in hub and install cap
6. Remove and inspect wheel hub (3) with bearing cups. screws (8). Torque cap screws to specification.
To replace bearing cups, place wheel hub on flat
surface and drive bearing cups out with a hammer and Specification
driver. Thrust Plate Cap
Screws—Torque..........................................................................120 N·m
IMPORTANT: Removing seal ring (1) will destroy it. Do 89 lb-ft
not remove seal ring unless damage is noted.
15. Grease and install O-ring (4) on wheel hub cover (9).
7. Remove bearing cone (2) using wedges. Drive wheel hub cover into wheel hub.

Continued on next page MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-1/2

3-9-1 PN=135
020113
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

16. Install hub cover plug (10) and tighten to specification. 17. Install wheel and repeat process for other side.
Specification
Wheel Hub Cover
Plug—Torque.................................................................................15 N·m
133 lb-in
LOCTITE is a trademark of Loctite Corp.
MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-2/2

Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather


1. Open engine hood. Remove cap screws (A) and move
loader mast cover (B) aside. Take care not to damage
hose attached to bottom of windshield washer nozzle
(C).

T132464B —UN—13JUL00
2. Remove hydraulic reservoir breather (D).
NOTE: Avoid dripping hydraulic oil. Do not reroute
hydraulic reservoir breather hoses.

3. Install new hydraulic reservoir breather with arrow


pointing toward reservoir.
4. Install loader mast cover and cap screws. Close
engine hood.

A—Cap Screw (4 used) C—Windshield Washer Nozzle


B—Loader Mast Cover D—Hydraulic Reservoir
Breather

T132462B —UN—13JUL00
CED,OUO1079,582 -19-25AUG00-1/1

3-9-2 020113

PN=136
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier


3/Stage IIIA Engine
Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.
1. Open hood.

TX1035630A —UN—01FEB08
2. Unfasten clips (1) and remove air cleaner cover.
3. Slide primary element (2) and secondary element (3)
out to remove.
4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.
5. Install new secondary element and primary element.
Ensure that each element is properly centered and
seated.
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that

TX1035631A —UN—01FEB08
has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken
or missing, install a new element.

6. Install air cleaner cover. Fasten clips.

1— Clip (3 used) 3— Secondary Element


2— Primary Element

TX1035632A —UN—01FEB08
MD04263,0000128 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-9-3 020113

PN=137
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier


2/Stage II Engine
Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.
1. Open hood.

T133589B —UN—30AUG00
2. Unfasten clips (A) and remove air cleaner cover.
3. Slide primary element (B) and secondary element (C)
out to remove.
4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.
5. Install new secondary element and primary element.
Ensure that each element is properly centered and
seated.
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that

T133590B —UN—30AUG00
has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken
or missing, install a new element.

6. Install air cleaner cover with dust unloader valve


pointed down. Fasten clips.

A—Clip (3 used) C—Secondary Element


B—Primary Element

T133591B —UN—30AUG00
MD04263,0000129 -19-09JUL09-1/1

Replace Cab Air Filters


Cab Fresh Air Filter
1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.
2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.
T132588B —UN—18JUL00

3. Install new filter and filter cover.


4. Close latch.

A—Latch B—Fresh Air Filter Cover

Continued on next page MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-1/2

3-9-4 020113

PN=138
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Cab Recirculating Air Filter


1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab
recirculating air filter.
2. Install new filter and filter cover.

T132838B —UN—24JUL00
C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter
Cover

MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-2/2

Inspect Belt
Inspect serpentine belt (A) for wear and damage. See
your authorized dealer for replacement.

TX1035793A —UN—01FEB08
A—Serpentine Belt

T132357B —UN—13JUL00
MD04263,0000120 -19-18FEB09-1/1

3-9-5 020113

PN=139
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter


1. Turn hydraulic oil filter (A) counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new hydraulic oil
filter and install. Turn hydraulic oil filter clockwise until
sealing ring touches mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.
3. Check hydraulic oil level.
4. Start engine and run for 2 minutes to allow hydraulic oil
filter to fill with oil and to purge air from charge circuit.
5. Stop engine and check hydraulic oil level. See Check

T134790B —UN—24OCT00
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)
6. Check for leakage around hydraulic filter. Tighten just
enough to stop leaks, if necessary.

A—Hydraulic Oil Filter

Hydraulic Oil Filter

VD76477,000131A -19-01NOV10-1/1

Replace Fuel Breather


1. Open engine hood.
2. Pull fuel breather (1) off hose.

TX1058589A —UN—21APR09
3. Install new fuel breather with arrow on breather
pointing toward hose.
4. Close engine hood.

1— Fuel Breather

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1015463A —UN—29NOV06

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,0000138 -19-21APR09-1/1

3-9-6 020113

PN=140
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter


NOTE: Only approximately 8.0—8.5 L of oil will drain.
It is intended that the remainder of oil will remain
in the cooler and torque converter.

TX1002312A —UN—09JAN06
1. Remove transmission drain plug (1) from bottom of
transmission and drain oil into suitable container.
Dispose of waste properly.
Specification
Powershift Transmission
Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 15 L
4.0 gal

2. Install drain plug.


3. Turn transmission filter (2) counterclockwise and
remove.
4. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new transmission oil

TX1002248 —UN—06JAN06
filter and install. Turn filter clockwise until sealing ring
touches mounting surface, then tighten an additional
3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.
5. Turn handle of transmission dipstick (3)
counterclockwise and remove. Fill transmission with
oil through dipstick tube. See Transmission, Axles,
and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.
(Section 3-1.)
6. Start engine and run for 3 minutes to purge air from
charge circuit.
7. With engine running at slow idle, remove transmission

TX1035778A —UN—01FEB08
dipstick. Check transmission oil level and add oil
through dipstick tube as necessary. See Transmission,
Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Oil. (Section 3-1.)
8. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise
to tighten.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
1— Transmission Drain Plug 3— Transmission Dipstick
2— Transmission Filter

TX1004024A —UN—21FEB06

Tier 2/Stage II Engine

VD76477,00010F0 -19-29MAY09-1/1

3-9-7 020113

PN=141
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Check Coolant
See Check Coolant in Maintenance—As Required.
(Section 3-3.)
MD04263,0000170 -19-14SEP09-1/1

3-9-8 020113

PN=142
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance)
See your authorized dealer.
TX03679,00017DD -19-08MAY01-1/1

Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil


1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Move backhoe and stabilizers to transport position and
lower loader bucket to ground. Stop engine.

TX1035639A —UN—05FEB08
3. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (B).
4. Remove cap screw (C) and bracket (D). Route drain
hose (E) into a suitable container.
5. Remove cap (F) from end of drain hose and drain oil.
Allow adequate time for oil to drain. Dispose of waste
oil properly.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
Specification
Hydraulic Reservoir
Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 39 L
10.3 gal

6. Replace hydraulic oil filter. See Replace Hydraulic Oil


Filter. (Section 3-9.)

T131716D —UN—13JUL00
7. Install cap on drain hose.
8. Route drain hose for storage. Install bracket and cap
screw.
9. Refill hydraulic reservoir. See Transmission, Axles,
and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.
(Section 3-1.) Tier 2/Stage II Engine

10. Check oil level.


11. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap.

B—Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap E—Drain Hose


C—Cap Screw F— Cap

T134809B —UN—14FEB12
D—Bracket

MB60223,0000010 -19-10MAR09-1/1

3-10-1 020113

PN=143
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Change MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If


Equipped
1. Rotate wheel so drain plug (A) is at its lowest point,
remove plug and drain oil. Dispose of waste oil
properly.

T7371AP —UN—02OCT90
Specification
MFWD Front Wheel
Planetary Housing
Oil—Capacity...................................................................................... 1 L
1 qt

2. Install drain plug.


3. Rotate wheel so plug (A) is above OIL LEVEL line (B)
when line is horizontal.
4. Add oil to bottom of fill plug hole and install plug. See
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)

T105325 —UN—21NOV96
A—Plug B—Oil Level Line

MB60223,00000E3 -19-10MAR09-1/1

Change MFWD Front Axle Housing Oil—If


Equipped
NOTE: Dispose of drain oil properly.
MFWD axle housing is filled with HY-GARD™

TX1002311A —UN—06JAN06
gear oil at the factory. Fill MFWD axle housing
with HY-GARD oil to fill to proper level.

1. Remove drain plug (1) to drain oil. Dispose of waste


oil properly.
Specification
MFWD Front Axle
Housing Oil—Capacity..................................................................... 6.5 L
1.7 gal
1— Drain Plug 2— Fill Plug
2. Install drain plug.
3. Remove fill plug (2) and add oil so it is level with
bottom of fill plug hole. See Transmission, Axles, and 4. Install fill plug.
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section
3-1.)
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,0001280 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-10-2 020113

PN=144
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Change Rear Axle and Planetary Housing Oil


NOTE: Dispose of waste oil properly.

1. Drain rear axle and both planetary housings oil into a


container using drain plugs (1 and 2). Install plugs.

TX1003130A —UN—21FEB06
Specification
Rear Axle and Planetary
Housing Oil—Capacity...................................................................... 18 L
4.8 gal

2. Rotate wheel so plug (2) is above OIL LEVEL line (3)


when line is horizontal as shown.
Rear Axle Drain and Fill Plugs
3. Remove rear axle check and fill plug (4) and fill with
oil until level with bottom of fill plug hole. See Check
Rear Axle Oil Level. (Section 3-7.)
NOTE: It will take approximately 5 minutes for oil to
settle into outer housing when oil is warm.

4. Wait 5-10 minutes for oil to settle, then check level


again and add oil as necessary. If oil is cold, settle
time may increase.

TX1002260A —UN—06JAN06
5. Install all plugs.

1— Rear Axle Drain Plug 3— Planetary Housing Oil Level


2— Planetary Housing Drain Line
and Fill Plug 4— Rear Axle Check and Fill
Plug

Planetary Drain and Fill Plug

VD76477,000113F -19-01NOV10-1/1

3-10-3 020113

PN=145
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir Fill


Screen
1. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (1) from fill tube.
2. Remove retaining clip and hydraulic reservoir fill

TX1036006A —UN—04FEB08
screen from fill tube.
3. Inspect hydraulic reservoir fill screen and clean as
necessary.
4. Install hydraulic reservoir fill screen and retaining clip
in fill tube.
5. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap in fill tube.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

1— Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap

TX1035714A —UN—01FEB08
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

MD04263,000011C -19-20FEB09-1/1

3-10-4 020113

PN=146
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours
Draining the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1002480A —UN—10JAN06
TS281 —UN—23AUG88
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
pressurized cooling system can cause
serious burns.
Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only

TX1002481A —UN—10JAN06
when cool enough to touch with bare hands.
Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before
removing completely.

NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours


using clean water, and refill with new coolant.

Specification
Cooling System—Tier
3/Stage IIIA
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 25 L
6.6 gal

1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve

TX1035823A —UN—01FEB08
assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.
2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.
3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.
4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open
valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).
6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise
to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.
Dispose of waste properly.
TX1035800A —UN—05FEB08

7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and


remove hoses.
8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.

1— Radiator Drain Valve 3— Air Bleed Plug


2— Engine Block Coolant Drain 4— Valve
Valve

MD04263,0000175 -19-22APR09-1/1

3-11-1 020113

PN=147
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Draining the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II Engine

TX1002480A —UN—10JAN06
TS281 —UN—23AUG88
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
pressurized cooling system can cause
serious burns.
Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only

TX1002481A —UN—10JAN06
when cool enough to touch with bare hands.
Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before
removing completely.

NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours


using clean water, and refill with new coolant.

Specification
Cooling System—Tier
2/Stage II
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 21 L
5.5 gal

1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve

TX1014135A —UN—17NOV06
assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.
2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.
3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.
4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open
valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).
6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise
to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.
Dispose of waste properly.
TX1014137A —UN—26OCT06

7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and


remove hoses.
8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.

1— Radiator Drain Valve 4— Valve


2— Engine Block Coolant Drain 5— Surge Tank Cap
Valve
3— Air Bleed Plug

MD04263,0000176 -19-22APR09-1/1

3-11-2 020113

PN=148
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Filling the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA


Engine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot


spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank
cap unless the engine is cool. Release all

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
pressure before removing cap.

Specification
Cooling System—Tier
3/Stage IIIA
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 25 L
6.6 gal

1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve


assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.
2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.
3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant

TX1035823A —UN—01FEB08
stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.
4. Close valve and air bleed plug.
5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off
coolant.
6. Close surge tank cap.
IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate,
ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant
solution. Other types of antifreeze may
damage cylinder seals.

TX1035800A —UN—05FEB08
NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory
with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C
(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide
freeze protection for your machine.

FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type


low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant
extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.

3— Air Bleed Plug 5— Surge Tank Cap


4— Valve

TX1035828A —UN—01FEB08

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


MD04263,0000177 -19-07JUL09-1/1

3-11-3 020113

PN=149
Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Filling the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II


Engine

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot


spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank
cap unless the engine is cool. Release all

TS281 —UN—23AUG88
pressure before removing cap.

Specification
Cooling System—Tier
2/Stage II
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 21 L
5.5 gal

1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve


assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.
2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.

TX1014135A —UN—17NOV06
3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant
stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.
4. Close valve and air bleed plug.
5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off
coolant.
6. Close surge tank cap.
IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate,
ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant
solution. Other types of antifreeze may
damage cylinder seals.

TX1014137A —UN—26OCT06
NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory
with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C
(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide
freeze protection for your machine.

FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type


low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant
extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.
3— Air Bleed Plug 5— Surge Tank Cap
4— Valve

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


MD04263,0000178 -19-09JUL09-1/1

3-11-4 020113

PN=150
Miscellaneous—Machine
External Service Brake Inspection
Do first inspection at 5000 hours followed by 1000 hour
inspection intervals after the first 5000 hour inspection.
If the service brakes are subjected to severe duty, inspect

TX1002474A —UN—10JAN06
more frequently.
1. Inspect brakes for wear through the external inspection
ports (1 and 2).
2. Remove axle housing and replace brake disc if oil
grooves (3) on facing material are no longer visible.

1— Right Rear Wheel External 3— Oil Groove Right Rear Wheel External Inspection Port
Inspection Port
2— Left Rear Wheel External
Inspection Port

TX1002475A —UN—10JAN06
Left Rear Wheel External Inspection Port

TX1002476A —UN—10JAN06

Oil Groove
VD76477,0001222 -19-05NOV10-1/1

4-1-1 020113

PN=151
Miscellaneous—Machine

Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock


Checking Boom Lock Operation
1. Operate the boom lock lever repeatedly to verify
proper operation.

TX1002083 —UN—06JAN06
2. If boom lock is out of adjustment, adjust per procedure.
Adjusting the Boom Lock
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to lock system, adjust
lock so it is able to pass through full range
of motion. Lock must completely clear boom
hook (1) when boom lock lever is pulled, and
go down to stop (2) when lever is released with Right Side Shown
boom moved away from latch area.
1— Boom Hook (2 used) 4— Yoke (2 used)
Perform the following adjustment for both the left and right 2— Stop (4 used) 5— Jam Nut (2 used)
boom locks: 3— Pin (2 used)

NOTE: Boom lock is not shim adjustable.

1. Start machine and lower stabilizers. 6. Remove pin (3) and spring from boom lock.

2. Move boom in slightly towards machine to relieve 7. Adjust position of yoke (4) so when the boom lock
tension on boom lock. control lever is at rest, yoke is aligned with pin
mounting hole.
3. Pull in on boom lock lever. While moving boom away
from machine, verify boom locks completely clear 8. Tighten jam nut (5) to hold yoke in adjusted position.
boom hooks (1). 9. Install pin.
4. Once boom is away from latch area, verify locks 10. Repeat yoke adjust procedure on opposite side of
contact stops (2) on both sides of machine when boom machine.
lock lever is released.
11. Check boom lock operation per procedure to verify
5. Move boom back into transport position. Stop the proper operation.
engine.
MD04263,000034E -19-03APR09-1/1

4-1-2 020113

PN=152
Miscellaneous—Machine

Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty Secondary


and Primary Element
IMPORTANT: A damaged or dirty element may
cause engine damage.
Install new elements:

T90684 —UN—10NOV88
• If the element shows damage and
needs to be replaced.
• If element is visibly dirty and will not clean.
• After 1000 hours service or annually.
DO NOT clean a secondary element. Install a
new element carefully centering it in the canister.

1. Tap element with the palm of your hand, NOT ON A


HARD SURFACE.

T47764 —UN—09NOV88
CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than
210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi) when using for cleaning
purposes. Clear area of bystanders, guard
against flying chips, and wear personal protection
equipment including eye protection.

2. If this does not remove dust, use compressed air


under 210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi). has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken
or missing, install a new element.
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed 3. Direct air up and down the pleats from inside to
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that outside. Be careful not to make a break in the element.
TX03679,00017E3 -19-08FEB07-1/1

Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped


IMPORTANT: Prevent possible compressor damage.
If moisture sight glass color indicates wet
(pink), dryer is saturated and should be changed
within the next 100 machine hours to prevent

T158049B —UN—26JUL02
further buildup of moisture in refrigerant.

1. Open hood.
2. Check color in moisture sight glass (A). Color should
be blue, indicating that refrigerant is dry.
3. Check air bubble sight glass (B) for air bubbles. No air
bubbles, or few air bubbles, should be visible.
4. If moisture sight glass shows wet (pink), or if excessive A—Moisture Sight Glass B—Air Bubble Sight Glass
air bubbles are visible, see your authorized dealer
within the next 100 machine hours to service the
receiver-dryer.
HG31779,00000BF -19-26JUL02-1/1

4-1-3 020113

PN=153
Miscellaneous—Machine

Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator


Check upper radiator hose (1) and lower radiator hose (2)
for cracks and leaks. Tighten hose clamps at each end of
hoses as necessary.

TX1035770A —UN—01FEB08
Check radiator for dirt, damage, leaks, and loose or
broken mountings. Clean radiator fins.

1— Upper Radiator Hose 2— Lower Radiator Hose

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1002477A —UN—10JAN06
Tier 2/Stage II Engine

TX1035798A —UN—04FEB08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1014134A —UN—26OCT06

Tier 2/Stage II Engine


MD04263,0000149 -19-20FEB09-1/1

4-1-4 020113

PN=154
Miscellaneous—Machine

Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles


Changing the injection pump in any way not approved by
or Injection Pump the manufacturer will end the warranty. See your copy of
If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty, the John Deere warranty on this machine.
the engine will not run normally. See your authorized Do not service an injection pump that is not operating
dealer for service. correctly. See your authorized injection pump service
center.
TX,90,FF3116 -19-03NOV08-1/1

Precautions for Alternator and Regulator

When batteries are connected, follow these rules: 6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct
1. Disconnect negative (—) battery cable when you work polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [—] to
on or near alternator or regulator. negative [—]).

2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR 7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is
REGULATOR. running and alternator is charging.

3. Ensure alternator wires are correctly connected 8. Disconnect battery cables before you connect battery
BEFORE you connect batteries. charger to the batteries.

4. Do not ground alternator output terminal.


5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or
regulator wires while batteries are connected or while
alternator is operating.
T82,EXMA,I -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-5 020113

PN=155
Miscellaneous—Machine

Using Battery Charger

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding


battery. Do not charge a battery if the battery
is frozen or it may explode. Warm battery to
16°C (60°F) before charging.

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
Turn off charger before connecting or
disconnecting it.

IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a


booster if a battery has a 1.150 specific
gravity reading or lower.
Prevent Battery Explosions
Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before
you charge batteries in the machine to prevent
damage to electrical components.

A battery charger may be used as a booster to start engine.


Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case feels hot,
or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must not
exceed 52°C (125°F).

N36890 —UN—07OCT88
Charger
OUT4001,0000239 -19-03JAN12-1/1

Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System


Before boost starting, machine must be properly shut
down to prevent unexpected machine movement when
engine starts.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding TS204 —UN—23AUG88


battery. An explosive gas is produced while
batteries are in use or being charged. Keep flames
or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure
the batteries are charged in a well ventilated area.

IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is


a 12-volt negative (-) ground. Use only
12-volt booster batteries.
3. Start engine.
1. Connect one end of the positive cable to the positive
terminal of the machine batteries and the other end to 4. Immediately after starting engine disconnect end of
the positive terminal of the booster batteries. the negative cable from the machine. Then disconnect
the other end of the negative cable from the negative
2. Connect one end of the negative cable to the negative terminal of the booster batteries.
terminal of the booster batteries. Connect other end
of the negative cable to the machine as far away from 5. Disconnect positive cable from booster batteries and
the machine batteries as possible. machine batteries.
OUT4001,00000E1 -19-02JUL09-1/1

4-1-6 020113

PN=156
Miscellaneous—Machine

Handling, Checking and Servicing Batteries


Carefully

CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks


and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
Never check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp
first and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.

TS203 —UN—23AUG88
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt).
3. Get medical attention immediately.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related


accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the battery cells.
If electrolyte spills on the floor, use one of the following
mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb) baking soda Check the specific gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell.
in 4 L (1 gal) water, or 0.47 L (1 pt) household ammonia in
4 L (1 gal) water.
Continued on next page TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-1/2

4-1-7 020113

PN=157
Miscellaneous—Machine

See your authorized dealer for JT05460


SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow
directions included with the tester.
A fully charged battery will have a corrected specific
gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200,

T85402 —UN—10NOV88
charge the battery.

Battery And Coolant Tester

SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company


TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-2/2

Replacing Batteries
Your machine may be equipped with one or two 12-volt
hybrid batteries with (—) negative ground. Use only
batteries meeting following specifications:
Cold Cranking Amps

TS204 —UN—23AUG88
Reserve
Capacity
-29°C (minutes at
Volts BCI Group -18°C (0°F) (-20°F) 25 amps)
12 31 750 600 150

TX,90,BG212 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-8 020113

PN=158
Miscellaneous—Machine

Removing Batteries
NOTE: Check for worn or frayed wires and loose
or corroded connections.

NOTE: The toolbox must be removed to access the battery

T132012C —UN—14JUL00
box. Always empty the toolbox before lifting it.

1. Remove cap screws (A) and lift toolbox out of battery


box.
2. Disconnect negative (—) battery cables first, then
positive (+) cables.
3. Remove nuts, washers, and hold-down brackets (B).
4. Lift batteries out of battery box.

A—Cap Screw (3 used) B—Hold-Down Bracket (1 or 2


used)

T158046B —UN—26JUL02
Optional Dual-Battery Configuration Shown
HG31779,00000BD -19-07JUL09-1/1

JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical
(MMS)—If Equipped machine health data and service status.

JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information For more information, see your authorized dealer or visit
delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services and
manages information about where and how construction Support, JDLink™).
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,0001541 -19-20JUL12-1/1

Replacing Fuses
The fuse block is located to the right of the operator's seat
below the loader control lever.

TX1013959A —UN—26OCT06

Continued on next page MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-1/5

4-1-9 020113

PN=159
Miscellaneous—Machine

A F44

F12 F40

F13 F41

F10 F42

F11 F45

A F46

F15 F47

K6 F30

F35
K9
F31

F36
B
K2 A

A
F48

TX1035704 —UN—30JAN08
TX1035704
Fuse Panel—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
A—Spare F15— Monitor-Service F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse
B—Diagnostic Connector ADVISOR™ Fuse Fuse F47— Aux Function Power
F10— Key Switch Fuse F30— Monitor-Flex Load F36— Transmission Control Fuse Connectors Fuse
F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse Controller (FLC)-Flex F40— Docking-Front Work Lights F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse
(unswitched) Hydraulic Controller (FHC) Fuse K2—Ignition Relay
F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse (Sswitched) Fuse F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon K6—Transmission Relay
F13— Flex Load Controller F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse Lights Fuse K9—Fuel Pump Lift Relay
(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse
Controller (FHC)-Flasher F44— Blower Fuse
Fuse (unswitched) F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port
Fuse

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company


Continued on next page MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-2/5

4-1-10 020113

PN=160
Miscellaneous—Machine

A F44

F12 F40

F13 F41

F10 F42

F11 F45

A F46

F15 F47

K6 F30

F35
A F31

F36
B
K2 A

TX1014514 —UN—28NOV06
F48

TX1014514
Fuse Panel—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
A—Spare F15— Monitor-Service F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse
B—Diagnostic Connector ADVISOR™ Fuse Fuse F47— Aux Function Power
F10— Key Switch Fuse F30— Monitor-Flex Load F36— Transmission Control Fuse Connectors-Water In Fuel
F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse Controller (FLC)-Flex F40— Docking-Front Work Lights (WIF) (If Equipped) Fuse
(Unswitched) Hydraulic Controller (FHC) Fuse F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse
F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse (Switched) Fuse F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon K2—Ignition Relay
F13— Flex Load Controller F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse Lights Fuse K6—Transmission Relay
(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse
Controller (FHC)-Flasher F44— Blower Fuse
Fuse (Unswitched) F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port
Fuse

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company


Continued on next page MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-3/5

4-1-11 020113

PN=161
Miscellaneous—Machine

F50— JDLink ™ Unswitched F52— JDLink ™ Ground 7.5A


Power 7.5A Fuse Fuse
F51— JDLink ™ Switched F53— JDLink ™ Alternator Run
Power 3A Fuse Signal 3A Fuse

F51 F52

TX1027209 —UN—02AUG07
F50 F53

JDLink™ Fuse Locations—If Equipped

JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company


Continued on next page MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-4/5

4-1-12 020113

PN=162
Miscellaneous—Machine

Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fuse


NOTE: The ECU fuse on Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines is a
20A fuse. On Tier 2/Stage II engines it is a 10A fuse.

ECU fuse (1) is located on the left-hand side of engine.

TX1035854A —UN—01FEB08
1— Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Fuse

Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

TX1002532A —UN—12JAN06
Tier 2/Stage II Engine
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-5/5

Remove and Install Halogen Bulb


1. Remove screws (1), cover (2), lamp (3), and lamp
housing (5).
2. Disconnect wiring lead and release retainer clip to

TX1002234A —UN—07JAN06
remove bulb (4).
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the halogen bulb with bare
hands. Oil and moisture may cause premature
bulb failure. Clean bulb glass if touched,
using an oil-free cloth with alcohol.

3. Install new bulb, lamp and assemble housing.


Lamp (exploded view)
1— Screw (4 used) 4— Bulb
2— Lamp Cover 5— Lamp Housing
3— Lamp

VD76477,00010D3 -19-05NOV10-1/1

4-1-13 020113

PN=163
Miscellaneous—Machine

Checking Starting System

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death. DO


NOT attempt to start machine unless you are
sitting in operator’s seat. DO NOT bypass or

TX1002514A —UN—10JAN06
disable any of the starting system parts.
Set park brake before attempting to start engine.

1. Fasten seat belt.


2. Operator's seat facing forward (loader position) and
locked.
3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear
forward (1F). 1— Transmission control lever
(TCL)
4. Apply service brakes.
5. Start the engine.
NOTE: The engine will start with the TCL in forward, F, 6. Display will show Release Park Brake. Display will
or reverse, R, but the controller will automatically not show F, forward, or R, reverse, until TCL is cycled
shift the transmission to neutral (N). back to neutral and park brake is released.
VD76477,0001146 -19-13JUL09-1/1

Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped


Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine

1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port 3— Transmission Oil Sample


2— Engine Oil Sample Port Port

TX1036119A —UN—05FEB08
4— Coolant Sample Port

Located Under Cab Door

TX1036120A —UN—05FEB08

Right Side of Engine


Continued on next page MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-1/2

4-1-14 020113

PN=164
Miscellaneous—Machine

Tier 2/Stage II Engine


The fluid sampling ports are located on the right side of
the engine.

1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port 3— Transmission Oil Sample

TX1002648A —UN—19JAN06
2— Engine Oil Sample Port Port
4— Coolant Sample Port

MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-2/2

Changing Loader Buckets

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from falling


hardware. Bucket cylinder and links will fall
forward if bucket is in dig position when pins
are removed. Remove pins only when bucket
is on ground in full dump position.

1. Position bucket as shown.


2. Attach a hoist to cylinder (5).
3. Remove pin (1) and rotate pivot links (2) to rear
against cross tube (3).
4. Remove pin (4) and carefully lay cylinder on cross tube.
5. Tie pivot links to the cross tube.

CAUTION: Bucket is heavy and can cause


injury if not moved properly. Use adequate
lifting device to move bucket.

TX1015068A —UN—14NOV06
6. Remove retaining hardware, pins (6) and bucket.
7. Position new bucket in dump position. Install pins (6).
8. Untie pivot links from cross tube. Remove hoist from
cylinder.
9. Connect pivot links and cylinder using previously
removed pins (1 and 4) and retaining hardware.
1— Pin 4— Pin
2— Pivot Link (2 used) 5— Cylinder
3— Cross Tube 6— Pin (2 used)

VD76477,000129C -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-15 020113

PN=165
Miscellaneous—Machine

Adding Front Counterweights

CAUTION: Counterweights are heavy and


can cause serious injury if dropped. Ensure
counterweights are properly supported

TX1003042A —UN—24JAN06
with a forklift or other adequate lifting
device before removing.

Install front counterweights for added stability as


necessary.
1. Support counterweights with a forklift before adding or
removing weights. Insert forklift tines in slots (1).
2. Remove cap screws (2).
1— Slot (2 used) 3— Counterweight
3. Remove or add counterweight (3) as necessary. 2— Cap Screw (2 used)
4. Install cap screws.
VD76477,00012A1 -19-09JUL09-1/1

Reversing Stabilizer Feet


Use rubber pad side (A) of stabilizer foot when operating
on paved surface to prevent damaging work area.
Use cleat side (B) of stabilizer foot when operating in dirt
to prevent slipping.
To change foot surface, remove pin (C), rotate foot 180° to
opposite surface, and install pin to keep foot from turning
back around.

A—Rubber Pad Side C—Pin


B—Cleat Side

T8214AO —UN—27APR94

VD76477,00010D4 -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-1-16 020113

PN=166
Miscellaneous—Machine

Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires NOTE: Approximately 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) CaCl2 per liter
See Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.) (gallon) of water will stay slush free to —24°C
(—12°F) and will freeze solid at —47°C (—52°F).
Weights given are for front tires 75 percent full of water or
a 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) per liter (gallon) of water calcium chloride
(CaCl2) solution.
Water Only Water/CaCl2 Solution
Total Weight Per
Tire Size Volume Weight Volume Weight
Tire
11L-15 53 L 53 kg 45 L 19 kg 64 kg
14 gal 117 lb 12 gal 42 lb 141 lb
11L-16 57 L 57 kg 49 L 21 kg 70 kg
15 gal 126 lb 13 gal 46 lb 154 lb
12-16.5 57 L 57 kg 49 L 21 kg 70 kg
15 gal 126 lb 13 gal 46 lb 154 lb
12.5/80-18 83 L 83 kg 64 L 38 kg 102 kg
22 gal 183 lb 17 gal 84 lb 225 lb
14.5/75-16.1 102 L 102 kg 87 L 37 kg 124 kg
27 gal 225 lb 23 gal 82 lb 273 lb
15-19.5 109 L 109 kg 95 L 39 kg 134 kg
29 gal 240 lb 25 gal 86 lb 295 lb
16.5L-16.1 156 L 156 kg 133 L 55 kg 188 kg
41 gal 344 lb 35 gal 121 lb 414 lb
TX18203,00004BC -19-19JUN09-1/1

Welding On Machine
Keep this story and Welding Near Electronic Control Units
UPDATE IN PROGRESS-7-23-09. SEE OM LEAD FOR story next to each other when applicable.
CORRECT CONTENT.
VD76477,00004EC -19-23JUL09-1/1

4-1-17 020113

PN=167
Miscellaneous—Machine

Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If


Equipped

CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can


penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

X9811 —UN—23AUG88
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all connections before applying pressure. Search
for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
and body from high pressure fluids.

CAUTION: Clear area of bystanders. The boom


will jump upward during this check. Make
sure area around bucket is clear.

1. Start engine.

TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
2. Run engine at high idle.
3. Push ride control switch (1) to on position.
4. Raise boom to maximum height.
5. Power boom down half-way to ground.
6. Stop suddenly by releasing loader control lever.
7. If boom is not cushioned when loader valve is
released, see your authorized dealer for servicing the
1— Ride Control Switch
accumulator.
VD76477,0001137 -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-18 020113

PN=168
Miscellaneous—Machine

Discharge Ride Control System Hydraulic


Pressure—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from


unexpected boom or bucket movement when

TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
equipped with ride control. Ride control
accumulator energy must be discharged when
working on hydraulic components. Turn key
switch to ON. Push upper half of ride control
switch to activate ride control and move
loader control lever to FLOAT.
Do not have ride control activated when starting
the machine; the machine may move if ride
control is activated when the machine is started. 1— Ride Control Switch
Do not have ride control activated when
operating the loader; the ride control system
may cause unexpected movement. 4. Position front loader boom so that the bucket is
approximately 30 cm (1 ft) off the ground.
The ride control system has an accumulator and valve
in the loader circuit. 5. Stop the engine.
Before servicing or performing maintenance on the 6. Turn key switch to ON without restarting engine. Push
machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the ride upper half of ride control switch to activate ride control.
control system as follows:
7. Move loader control lever to float position. Bucket
1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear. should lower to ground.
2. Push lower half of ride control switch (1) to deactivate 8. If ride control accumulator has lost gas charge, see
ride control. Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If Equipped in
this section.
3. Start the engine.
VD76477,0001138 -19-07JUL09-1/1

Discharge Pilot Control System Hydraulic


Pressure—If Equipped

CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected


machine movement. Turn engine off. Keep

T163349B —UN—02JAN03
bystanders clear of machine.

Before servicing or performing maintenance on the


machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the pilot
control system as follows:
1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear.
2. Turn off engine.
3. Turn key switch to “ON” position. 1— Pilot Control Enable/Dis- 2— Pilot Controls
able Switch
4. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.
5. Pull pilot control towers back to operating position.
7. Actuate pilot controls (2) in a circular pattern for five
6. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (1) to “Unlock”
to ten rotations.
position to enable pilot controls.
HG31779,00001BD -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-19 020113

PN=169
Miscellaneous—Machine

Lowering Boom Without Electrical


Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls
1. Remove rear half of floor mat.
2. Remove cap screws (1) and plastic cover (2).

T163972B —UN—15JAN03
3. Remove cap screws (3) and rear cab access floor
plate (4).

1— Cap Screw (4 used) 3— Cap Screw (4 used)


2— Plastic Cover 4— Rear Cab Access Floor
Plate

BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-1/2

4. Disconnect hose (5) from bulkhead fitting (6).


5. Connect remote pressure source to bulkhead fitting.
Pressure source must be within specification.
Specification
Remote Pressure

T164626B —UN—27JAN03
Source—Pressure...................................................... 1379—24 821 kPa
14—248 bar
200—3600 psi

6. Lower boom using pilot controls.


7. Disconnect remote pressure source.
8. Connect hose to bulkhead fitting (6).
9. Install rear access floor plate. 5— Hose 6— Pilot Pressure Bulkhead
Fitting
10. Install plastic cover and floor mat.
BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-2/2

Check Park Brake


CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Fasten seat
belt before performing this check.
TX1013963A —UN—20DEC06
1. Fasten seat belt.
2. Start machine on dry, hard pavement.
3. Raise loader and backhoe buckets off ground.
4. Push right half of park brake switch (1) to disengage
the park brake.
5. Disengage MFWD, if equipped.
1— Park Brake Switch
6. Move the transmission control lever (TCL) to F. Move
the gearshift lever to 2nd gear.
7. Depress the speed control pedal to the floor and drive must stop within 2 m (6 ft) and transmission must shift
approximately 7 m (20 ft), then push left half of park to neutral.
brake switch to engage the park brake. The machine
VD76477,0001139 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-20 020113

PN=170
Miscellaneous—Machine

Bleeding Fuel System


NOTE: Whenever the fuel system has been opened up
for service (lines disconnected or filters removed),
or if machine has run out of fuel, it may be
necessary to bleed air from the system.

TX1002309A —UN—06JAN06
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve
pressure before disconnecting fuel or other
lines. Tighten all connections before applying
pressure. Keep hands and body away from
pinholes and nozzles that eject fluids under high
pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to
search for leaks. Do not use your hand. Final Fuel Filter on Tier 2/Stage II Engine
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, a doctor
familiar with this type of injury must surgically 1— Retaining Ring 7— Bleed Screw
remove it within a few hours or gangrene 2— Final Fuel Filter 8— Primer Lever
may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this 3— Water Separator Assembly
type of injury may call the Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, or other
knowledgeable medical source. 6. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.

Tier 2/Stage II Engine 7. Start engine.

NOTE: If machine is equipped with auxiliary water Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
separator fuel filter the fuel tank must be
The fuel system for Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine is
completely full.
self-bleeding.
1. Fill fuel tank. 1. Fill fuel tank.
2. Open bleed screw (7) on final fuel filter (2). 2. Turn key switch to the ON position.
3. Pump primer lever (8) on fuel transfer pump until air 3. Wait 2 minutes.
free fuel stream is observed out of the bleed screw.
4. Turn key switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed
approximately 65 times. 5. Turn key switch back to the ON position.
6. Wait 2 minutes.
4. Close bleed screw on final fuel filter.
7. Start engine.
5. Pump primer lever on fuel transfer pump until
resistance is felt.
NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed
approximately 15 times.
TX18203,00004B9 -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-21 020113

PN=171
Miscellaneous—Machine

Brake Bleeding Procedure

TX1074504 —UN—07APR10
4

TX1074504
Brake Bleeding Procedure Using Bleed Screw Method
1— Bleed Screw (right side) 2— Clear Plastic Tube 4— Bleed Screw (left side)
3— Container

methods are much slower methods but may be used as


CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Do not operate alternates.
machine if pedal travel exceeds 133 mm (5.25
in.) while applying 267 N (60 lb-force). Operating Bleed Screw Method
machine with excessive brake travel could cause
brakes not to stop machine on first application. NOTE: Two people are required to bleed brake system
oil, one to operate brake valve and other to
NOTE: Air will "gravity bleed" from brake system through open and close bleed screws.
brake valve without use of bleed screws but the
procedure may take much longer so bleed screw CAUTION: Hot oil can cause serious burn
method is the recommended procedure. Brake injury. Secure drain hose on bleed screw and
lines must be inclined toward brake valve for in container to prevent it from blowing off when
procedures other than bleed method. bleed screw is opened while brakes are applied.
Low ambient temperature or aeration of oil
will slow bleed process. 1. Secure a clear plastic tube (2) on bleed screw (4) with
hose clamp and secure other end in a small container
The rear axle is equipped with two brake bleed (3).
screws, one for each wheel. Brake bleeding must be
done whenever the brake system has been opened 2. Start engine and run at slow idle with park brake on.
to repair or after replacing the brake valve, brake 3. Steer from right to left stop-to-stop three times to fill
lines, fitting, O-rings or axle internal brake parts. the brake valve reservoir.
Both brake pedals may be depressed at one time 4. Shut off engine.
even though bleeding is done one side at a time.
NOTE: Only two pedal bleeding applications can be done
All fittings must be inspected for leaks and tightened if without refilling the brake valve reservoir.
leaks occur.
Bleed screw must be closed before the fully
The preferred method for the brake bleeding procedure is depressed pedal reaches the floor.
to use the bleed screw method. The vacuum and manual
Continued on next page JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-1/3

4-1-22 020113

PN=172
Miscellaneous—Machine

5. Depress and hold the brake pedal, and open one Repeat the process until oil from bleed screw runs
(side) service brake bleed screw to allow air and oil clear and without air.
mixture into a container. Close bleed screw before
pedal reaches maximum travel or floor. 6. Repeat process for opposite side.
If the bleeding procedure (applying brake pedal full 7. After bleeding process is completed, pump each pedal
distance or travel) is done more than twice, fill the to check if pedal is firm.
brake valve reservoir again by starting the machine
and steering from stop-to-stop three times.
JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-2/3

8. Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to


specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal
as shown.
Specification
Dual Brake Pedal
Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................. 95 mm
3.75 in.
Single Brake Pedal
Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................114 mm
4.5 in.
1
9. Recycle old oil. A
Vacuum Method

TX1081823 —UN—21SEP10
1. Engage park brake. Connect a vacuum to breather
port on hydraulic reservoir. After 10 minutes,
disconnect air pressure.
2. Leave hose from breather port to vacuum device
connected until brake circuit is filled with oil. Both
pedals should become solid.
3. Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to Brake Pedal Travel
specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal
as shown.
1— Brake Pedal A—Travel Distance
Manual Method
1. Engage park brake. Run engine at slow idle.
5. Pump right-hand pedal until pedal is solid, then pump
2. Steer from stop-to-stop three or four times to fill the both pedals together until pedals are solid.
brake valve reservoir.
6. Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to
3. Pump left-hand brake pedal five times, allowing 2 specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal
seconds between each pump for air to escape. as shown.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the left-hand pedal is solid.
JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-3/3

4-1-23 020113

PN=173
Miscellaneous—Machine

Service Recommendations For Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings


Snap-To-Connect (STC®) fittings are used on this
machine. The fittings are designed to allow the hydraulic
hose to rotate as needed when the system is not
pressurized. This prevents the hydraulic hoses from
binding when components are put back to their operating
position.

T161381C —UN—14APR03
Fittings are easily disconnected using JDG1385 Special
Tool (1) (supplied with machine). The special tool has a
different size slot cut into each end. The narrow slot is
for -06 size fittings. The wide slot is for -08 size fittings.
Use appropriate end of special tool on fitting being
disconnected. To connect fittings, simply push each half
of fitting together. JDG1385 Special Tool Storage Location In Toolbox
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pry against release sleeve
or damage to fitting may result.
DO NOT force release sleeve beyond normal
range of travel, otherwise, release sleeve may
fall off when hose is disconnected. If this

T134792C —UN—24OCT00
happens and fitting is connected without the
release sleeve installed, fitting will not be
able to be disconnected again.

1. Disconnect STC type fittings:


a. Clean area around fitting, especially around the
release sleeve (3).
STC Fitting and JDG1385 Special Tool
b. While keeping JDG1385 Special Tool perpendicular
to the fitting, insert tool between release sleeve and 1— JDG1385 Special Tool 3— Release Sleeve
shoulder (2). 2— Shoulder

c. Gently push, DO NOT PRY, release sleeve away


from shoulder to disconnect the fitting.
d. Pull hose to disconnect.
Snap-To-Connect is a trademark of Eaton Corp
Continued on next page MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-1/2

4-1-24 020113

PN=174
Miscellaneous—Machine

2. Inspect STC fittings:


a. Check seal mating surfaces for nicks, scratches,
or flat spots.
b. Check O-ring (4), backup ring (5), and retaining ring
(2) for wear or damage.

T133922 —UN—21SEP00
c. Make sure O-ring, backup ring, and retaining ring are
in position before connecting fitting halves together.
3. Connect STC fittings:
a. Make sure fitting halves (3 and 6) are clean and
free of contaminants.
STC Fitting Cross Section
b. Make sure release sleeve (1) is on male half of STC
fitting (6) before connecting fitting halves together. 1— Release Sleeve 4— O-Ring
2— Retaining Ring 5— Backup Ring
c. Push fitting halves together until a definite snap and 3— Female Half of STC Fitting 6— Male Half of STC Fitting
solid stop is felt.
d. Pull back on hose to make sure fitting halves are
locked together.
e. To prevent hoses from binding, move component
into position before pressurizing hydraulic system.
MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-2/2

Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If


Equipped
1. Turn lever (1) counterclockwise to loosen.
2. Adjust wrist rest (2) up or down to desired position.

T163361B —UN—02JAN03
3. Turn lever clockwise to tighten.

1— Lever 2— Wrist Rest

HG31779,00001BE -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-1-25 020113

PN=175
Miscellaneous—Machine

Toe-In Check and Adjust


SPECIFICATIONS
Non-Powered Axle and 3—6 mm
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive 0.13—0.25 in.
(MFWD) Axle Toe-In Distance
Tie Rod Jam Nut Torque 120 N•m

T6382JW —UN—02NOV88
89 lb-ft

Toe-In Measurement Check


1. Measure distance from ground to center of both hubs
(A). Mark front (B) and rear (C) of each front tire in
center of tread.
Toe-In Measurement
2. Measure distance between front marks (B) and rear
marks (C).
A—Center of Hub C—Rear of Tire
3. Front marks must be closer than rear marks within B—Front of Tire D—Tie Rod Tube
specification.
Specification
Non-Powered Axle 4. If measurements are not within specification, see your
and Mechanical Front authorized dealer for adjustment.
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Axle—Distance...........................................................................3—6 mm
0.13—0.25 in.
VD76477,00012C0 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-1-26 020113

PN=176
Miscellaneous—Machine

Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket


1. Position flex pin (C) with grooves (D) toward the tooth
tip. The grooves are the locking mechanism.
NOTE: If "back" is stamped on the pin, this word
must face the shank.

T7646AP —UN—16DEC91
If shank is badly worn, install new shank.
Install special teeth for digging in rock or frost.

2. To remove tooth tip (A), drive out flex pin.


3. To fasten tooth tip to shank (B), drive flex pin in place.

A—Tooth Tip C—Flex Pin


B—Tooth Shank D—Groove

T7646AO —UN—16DEC91
T7646AN —UN—16DEC91
TX,90,BD2190 -19-07JUL09-1/1

Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders, If these parts need service, see your authorized dealer.
Pumps or Motors
Special tools and information are needed to service
control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors.
T82,EXMA,BJ -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-27 020113

PN=177
Miscellaneous—Machine

Keep ROPS Installed Properly

CAUTION: Make certain all parts are reinstalled


correctly if the rollover protective structure
(ROPS) is loosened or removed for any reason.
Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque.

TS176 —UN—23AUG88
The protection offered by ROPS will be
impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural
damage, is involved in an overturn incident,
or is in any way altered. A damaged ROPS
should be replaced, not reused.

When installation of equipment on a machine necessitates


loosening or removing ROPS, mounting bolts must be
tightened to specification.
Specification
ROPS Mounting
Bolts—Torque..............................................................................420 N·m
310 lb-ft
VD76477,0001141 -19-21DEC06-1/1

Hardware Torque Specifications


Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight.
If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the
following charts unless a special torque is specified.
TX,90,FF1225 -19-16JAN08-1/1

4-1-28 020113

PN=178
Miscellaneous—Machine

Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values


TS1671 —UN—01MAY03

Bolt or Screw SAE Grade 1 SAE Grade 2a SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
b c
Size Lubricated Dry Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
1/4 3.7 33 4.7 42 6 53 7.5 66 9.5 84 12 106 13.5 120 17 150
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
5/16 7.7 68 9.8 86 12 106 15.5 137 19.5 172 25 221 28 20.5 35 26
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
3/8 13.5 120 17.5 155 22 194 27 240 35 26 44 32.5 49 36 63 46
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
7/16 22 194 28 20.5 35 26 44 32.5 56 41 70 52 80 59 100 74
N·m lb.-ft.
1/2 34 25 42 31 53 39 67 49 85 63 110 80 120 88 155 115
9/16 48 35.5 60 45 76 56 95 70 125 92 155 115 175 130 220 165
5/8 67 49 85 63 105 77 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 305 225
3/4 120 88 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 220 380 280 425 315 540 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 615 455 690 510 870 640
1 285 210 360 265 285 210 360 265 730 540 920 680 1030 760 1300 960
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 910 670 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 420 725 535 570 420 725 535 1280 945 1630 1200 2050 1500 2600 1920
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2140 1580 2700 2000 3400 2500
1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1

4-1-29 PN=179
020113
Miscellaneous—Machine

Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values


TS1670 —UN—01MAY03

4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9

4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9

Bolt or Screw Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Size Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
M6 4.7 42 6 53 8.9 79 11.3 100 13 115 16.5 146 15.5 137 19.5 172
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M8 11.5 102 14.5 128 22 194 27.5 243 32 23.5 40 29.5 37 27.5 47 35
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M10 23 204 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70
N·m lb.-ft.
M12 40 29.5 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120
M14 63 46 80 59 120 88 150 110 175 130 220 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 74 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 235 400 300
M18 135 100 170 125 265 195 330 245 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 245 180 375 275 475 350 530 390 675 500 625 460 790 580
M22 265 195 330 245 510 375 650 480 725 535 920 680 850 625 1080 800
M24 330 245 425 315 650 480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 460 950 700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475
M30 660 490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000
M33 900 665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
instructions are given for the specific application. wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1

Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock


1. Inspect loader boom service lock (1), cotter pin, and
retaining pin to ensure that all are in good condition.
2. Verify that warning decal is in place.
TX1002080A —UN—04JAN06

3. See your authorized dealer for replacement parts.

1— Loader Boom Service Lock

MB60223,00000E8 -19-11MAR09-1/1

4-1-30 PN=180
020113
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout Procedure
Use this procedure to check all systems and functions
A location will be required which is level and has adequate
on the machine. It is designed so you can make a quick
space to complete the checks. No tools or equipment are
check of machine operation while doing both a walk
needed to perform this checkout.
around inspection and performing specific checks from
the operator’s seat. Complete the necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil
condition, external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, wiring,
Should you experience a problem with your machine, you etc.) prior to doing the checkout. The machine must be at
will find helpful diagnostic information in this checkout that
operating temperature for many of the checks.
will pinpoint the cause. Use the table of contents to help
find adjustment procedures. This information may allow Locate the check to be performed at the top of the left
you to perform simple repairs yourself, reducing machine column and read completely down the column before
down time. performing the check. Follow this sequence from left
to right. In the far right column, if no problem is found,
The information obtained after completing the operational you will be instructed to go to next check. If a problem
checkout will allow you or your authorized dealer to is indicated, you will be referred to either a group in this
pinpoint a specific test or repair needed to restore the manual or to your authorized dealer for repair.
machine to specifications.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-1/46

Diagnostic Trouble Code Check


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-2/46


1 Display and Clear
Trouble Codes
Always check for diagnostic trouble codes and correct them before performing the
operational checkout.

Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using two methods:


• Standard Display Monitor (SDM) YES: Correct all
diagnostics trouble codes
before proceeding. See
your authorized dealer.
• Service Advisor NO: Proceed with
operational checkout.

MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-3/46

Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-4/46


1 Battery Check

TX1003151 —19—30JAN06
Key switch OFF.
Press SELECT button, on Standard Display Monitor (SDM), and hold until battery
volts are displayed.
NOTE: Fuel gauge will calibrate against the far left peg before returning to its YES: Go to next check.
normal operating position and engine hours will be displayed.
LOOK: Does battery volts read a minimum of 12 volts? NO: Test battery.

Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-5/46

4-2-1 020113

PN=181
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Key Switch ON, Engine Off Checks


Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-6/46

4-2-2 020113

PN=182
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


1 Standard Display
Monitor (SDM) Check

TX1003145 —UN—02FEB06
Model Number

TX1003151 —19—30JAN06
Key switch ON (engine NOT running).
Observe monitor and note changes (bulbs, indicators and gauges).
Press NEXT until the SDM displays gear, engine speed and hour meter.
NOTE: Starting motor must not operate. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do all lights and backlighting come on? NO: See your authorized
Does the display show the correct model number? dealer.
Do all gauge indicators point to approximately 12:00 o’clock position and then move to
their normal operating position?

TX1003153 —19—02FEB06
Key switch ON (engine NOT running).
Observe monitor. Press the NEXT button. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the display show volts, gear and engine speed? NO: See your authorized
dealer.

TX1003147 —UN—02FEB06
Key switch ON (engine NOT running).
Observe monitor. Press the NEXT button. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and hydraulic oil temperature? NO: See your authorized
dealer.

Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-7/46

4-2-3 020113

PN=183
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

N 0
JOB 132.4
TX1003154 —19—22JAN07
Key switch ON (engine NOT running).
Observe monitor. Press the NEXT button. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and job timer hours? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-8/46


2 Service Brake Pedal
Stop Check

T134625 —UN—19OCT00
Unlock brake pedals.
Lift left and right brake pedals individually.
LOOK: Does each pedal have a minimal amount of travel before cap screws contact YES: Go to next check.
stop?
NOTE: Gap between pedal stop screws and plate should be 0.127—0.381 NO: See your authorized
mm (0.005—0.015 in.). dealer.
This travel ensures that brake check valves are opened and brakes are released.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-9/46


3 Ride Control Electrical
Check (If Equipped)

TX1002661 —UN—13JAN06
Turn key switch ON (do not start engine).
Turn ride control switch ON. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator NO: See your authorized
light turn ON? dealer.
Turn ride control switch OFF. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator NO: See your authorized
light turn off? dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-10/46

Key Switch On, Engine On


Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-11/46

4-2-4 020113

PN=184
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


1 Park Brake Indicator
and Switch Check

TX1003182 —UN—30JAN06
Fasten Seat Belt.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Apply service brakes.
Start the engine.
Engine speed at slow idle.
LOOK: Is the PARK BRAKE indicator on?

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Release park brake.
LOOK: Is the Park Brake indicator OFF?
Apply park brake. YES: Go to next check.
Stop the engine. NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-12/46

4-2-5 020113

PN=185
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


2 Start Circuit Check

TX1003174 —UN—30JAN06

RELEASE
PA R K B R A K E
TX1003152 —19—22JAN07
Fasten seat belt.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward (1F).
Apply service brakes.
Start the engine.
Engine speed at slow idle.
NOTE: The engine will start with transmission control lever (TCL) in
forward (F) or reverse (R) but the controller will automatically shift
the transmission to neutral (N).
LOOK/LISTEN: Does the engine start?
Does display show RELEASE PARK BRAKE?

TX1003148 —UN—02FEB06
Apply service brakes.
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.
NOTE: Display will not show “F” forward or “R” reverse until the transmission control
lever (TCL) is cycled to neutral and the park brake has been released.
LOOK: Does display show neutral (N).
YES: Go to next check.

TX1003149 —UN—30JAN06
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward.
LOOK: Does display show 1F? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-13/46

4-2-6 020113

PN=186
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


3 Reverse Warning
Alarm Check

TX1003175 —UN—30JAN06
1R Gearshift Lever

TX1003150 —UN—30JAN06
1R Display
Engine speed at slow idle.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Apply service brakes.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear reverse (1R). YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does display show correct gear and direction? NO: See your authorized
Does the reverse warning alarm sound? dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-14/46


4 Transmission Gear
Shift Detent Check

TX1003176 —UN—30JAN06
Fasten seat belt.
Start the engine.
Engine speed at slow idle.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Apply service brakes.
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) into forward (F).
Turn transmission control lever (TCL) to shift into each gear. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does gear number align with pointer in each speed detent position? NO: Replace transmission
Does twist handle remain in detented positions? control lever (TCL)/range
Does display indicate correct gear and direction? switch.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-15/46

4-2-7 020113

PN=187
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


5 Park Brake Function
Check

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Fasten seat belt.
Start the engine.
Engine speed at slow idle.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Apply service brakes.
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 3rd gear forward (3F).
Slowly increase engine speed just enough to allow machine to start to move a few feet.
Apply the Park Brake.
NOTE: Transmission will shift to neutral (N) as soon as Park Brake is applied. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/FEEL: Does Park Brake engage immediately, when Park Brake Switch is NO: See your authorized
pushed and does the machine stop? dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-16/46


6 Pilot Control Tower
Operating/Stored
Position Check (If
Move pilot control towers into operating position.

Equipped)

Release towers.
LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in operating position?
Move pilot control towers into stored position. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in stored position? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-17/46


7 Pilot Control
Enable/Disable Switch
Check (If Equipped)
Run engine at 1500 rpm.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise machine off ground with stabilizers and loader bucket.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Disable pilot controls and move control levers. NO: Continue with check.
LOOK: Do activated functions move? YES: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-18/46

4-2-8 020113

PN=188
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


8 Pilot Control Pattern
Select Switch Check
(If Equipped)
Enable pilot controls.

Select backhoe from the two position pattern select switch.


Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward. YES: Continue with check.
LOOK: Does backhoe boom move when left pilot control lever is activated? NO: See your authorized
Does backhoe crowd move when right pilot control lever is activated? dealer.
Select excavator from the two position pattern select switch.
Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does backhoe crowd move when left pilot control lever is activated? NO: See your authorized
Does backhoe boom move when right pilot control lever is activated? dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-19/46


9 Pilot Control Valve
Check (If Equipped)
Enable pilot controls.

Move pilot control levers in all directions.


FEEL/LOOK: Do levers move freely in all directions? YES: Go to next check.
FEEL/LOOK: Do levers spring back to neutral when released? NO: If pilot control levers
bind during travel or do not
return to neutral position,
inspect controls and towers.
See your authorized dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-20/46


10 Pilot Control
Accumulator Check
(If Equipped)
Run engine at 1500 rpm.

Operators seat in backhoe position.


Enable pilot controls.
Disengage boom from boom lock.
Hold boom up function over relief for 10 seconds.
Turn engine off, and turn key switch to on.
NOTE: Pilot control enable switch must be cycled after key switch
is turned back into on position.
Cycle pilot enable switch to enable position.
Activate boom down function. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does boom lower when boom down function is activated? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-21/46


11 Backhoe Position
Control Pattern
Engine speed at slow idle.

Operator's seat facing backhoe position.


Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise left stabilizer.
Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise right stabilizer YES: Continue check.
LOOK: Do both stabilizers raise and lower? NO: See your authorized
dealer.

Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-22/46

4-2-9 PN=189
020113
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


12 Stabilizer Cylinder
Check
Engine speed at approximately 1500 rpm.

Position loader bucket off the ground.


Operator's seat facing backhoe position.

CAUTION: Machine will move forward as transmission control


lever (TCL) is moved into forward (F).

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Lower stabilizers to raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders extend smoothly and hold machine up?
Raise stabilizers. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders retract smoothly and remain up? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-23/46


13 Hydraulic and
Transmission Oil
Warmup Procedure
IMPORTANT: For the following checks all systems must be warmed up to
operating range to get accurate test results.

Check hydraulic oil temperature. If hydraulic oil temperature is not to specification allow
machine time to warm up to normal operating range.
Specification
Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C
140—160°F
Check transmission oil temperature. If transmission oil temperature is not to YES: Go to next check.
specification allow machine time to warm up to normal operating range.
Specification
Transmission Oil—Temperature...................................................................... 60—70°C
140—160°F
Are hydraulic and transmission oil temperature to specification? NO: Warm system to
specification.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-24/46

4-2-10 020113

PN=190
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


14 Cycle Times Check Engine at fast idle.

Record cycle time for each function.


Does machine perform within specifications? YES: Go to next check.

Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-25/46

4-2-11 020113

PN=191
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Specification NO: Check hydraulic


Loader boom raise (bucket flat on oil level. See Check
ground-to-full height)—Maximum Cycle Hydraulic Reservoir Oil
Time (seconds)............................................................................... 310J - 4.9 (seconds) Level. (Section 3-4.)
310SJ - 5.5 (seconds)
Loader boom lower—Powered
(full height-to-bucket flat on
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)
310SJ - 2.2 (seconds)
Loader boom lower—Float
(full height-to-bucket flat on
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)
310SJ - 2.2 (seconds)
Loader bucket dump (boom just above
ground—Maximum Cycle Time....................................................... 310J - 2.6 (seconds)
310SJ - 2.4 (seconds)
Loader bucket curl (boom just above
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time................................................................ 2.6 (seconds)
Backhoe boom raise (backhoe at
maximum reach, bucket teeth on
ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum
Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)
Backhoe boom lower (backhoe at
maximum reach, bucket teeth on
ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum
Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)
Crowd in (boom in transport
position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 3.1 (seconds)
Crowd out (boom in transport
position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 2.7 (seconds)
Backhoe bucket dump—Maximum Cycle
Time........................................................................................................... 2.4 (seconds)
Backhoe bucket curl—Maximum Cycle
Time........................................................................................................... 3.2 (seconds)
Backhoe swing (boom raised
to cushion, bucket curled,
dipperstick parallel to ground
cylinder-cushion-to-cylinder-cushion
(180°))—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................. 3.3 (seconds)
Extendible dipperstick extend—If
Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.4 (seconds)
Extendible dipperstick retract—If
Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.6 (seconds)
Right stabilizer down (full up-to-ground
level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)
Right stabilizer up (ground level-to-full
up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)
Left stabilizer down (full up-to-ground
level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)
Left stabilizer up (ground level-to-full
up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)
Steering right to left—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering left to right—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering right to left (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering left to right (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Does machine perform within specifications? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-26/46

4-2-12 020113

PN=192
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


15 Brake System Leakage
Check
NO: Go to next check.

T134626 —UN—19OCT00
Depress and hold left brake pedal, then right brake pedal using approximately 267 N
(60 lb-force).
Specification
Brake Pedal—Force................................................................................................267 N
60 lb
LOOK: Brake pedal must not feel spongy (caused by air in the system). Does pedal YES: Bleed brake system.
settle more than 25 mm (1.0 in.) per minute. See Brake Bleeding
Procedure. (Section 4-1.)
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-27/46


16 Brake Drag/Park
Brake Check

T6171AL —UN—09DEC88
Operator's seat in loader position.
Position machine on a gradual slope with front of machine facing downhill.
Lift loader bucket off the ground.
Transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.
Differential lock not actuated.

TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Release park brake.
Release service brakes.
Let machine coast freely for several feet.
Apply park brake.
LOOK: Did machine stop?
Release park brake.
LOOK: Did machine coast freely? YES: Go to next check.
NOTE: If machine does not move freely on slope, drive the machine for 5 minutes. NO: See your authorized
Feel axle housing area to locate which brake is dragging. dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-28/46

4-2-13 020113

PN=193
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


17 Engine Speed Select
Knob Check

TX1003184 —UN—30JAN06
Engine speed slow idle.
Auto-Idle OFF.
Lower all equipment to the ground.
Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.
Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.
Move speed control knob to slow idle, then to fast idle position. YES: Continue check.
LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast NO: See your authorized
Idle)? dealer.
Engine speed slow idle.
Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.
Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise rear wheels of machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) not actuated.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Engine speed slow idle.
Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.
Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.
Apply service brakes. YES: Continue check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Release service brakes. NO: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to 1200 rpm? YES: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-29/46


18 Engine Speed Control
Pedal Check
Engine speed slow idle.

Lower all equipment to the ground.


Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.
Move the engine speed control pedal from slow idle to fast idle. YES: Continue check.
LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast NO: See your authorized
Idle)? dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-30/46

4-2-14 020113

PN=194
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


19 Auto-Idle Circuit
Check (If Equipped)

TX1002663 —UN—13JAN06
Engine speed fast idle.
Auto-Idle switch OFF (Indicator light OFF).
Lower all equipment to the ground.
Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.
Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.
Push Auto-Idle Switch to ON. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4 to 6 seconds? Does Auto-Idle NO: See your authorized
indicator light come ON? dealer.
Slowly actuate any boom backhoe function. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to its original setting? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Rotate operator's seat to loader position.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does Auto-Idle indicator light go OFF? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-31/46


20 Engine and Torque
Converter Check
(Without MFWD)

T6171AM —UN—09DEC88
Engine speed slow idle.
Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Position machine with loader bucket at ground level against a dirt bank or immovable
object.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F) position.
Engage differential lock.
Increase engine speed to fast idle.
Release park brake.
LOOK: Do rear wheels stall? YES: Go to next check.
NOTE: This test will give a general indication of engine, transmission NO: See your authorized
and torque converter performance. dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-32/46

4-2-15 020113

PN=195
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


21 Transmission Neutral
Disconnect Circuit
Check
Fasten seat belt. Operator’s seat facing loader position.

Engine speed approximately 2000 rpm.


Raise loader bucket off the ground.
Shift transmission into 4th gear.
Release park brake.
Shift transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F).
LISTEN: Does engine rpm drop (approximately 50 rpm) when the transmission control
lever (TCL) is shifted into forward (F)?
Press button on loader control lever and note sound of engine. YES: Go to next check.
LISTEN: Does engine rpm increase when the neutral disconnect button is pressed? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-33/46


22 Differential Lock
Check

T6295AD —UN—19OCT88
Operator’s seat facing loader position.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Release park brake.
Unlock the brake pedals.
Turn mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch OFF (if equipped).
Depress differential lock control.
Operate machine at approximately 1200 rpm in 1st forward (1F).
Apply one brake pedal. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Both rear wheels must stop. NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-34/46


23 Differential Gear and
Pinion Check
Operator’s seat facing loader position.

Release park brake.


Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F) position.
Steer machine in a maximum left turn and depress left brake pedal to stop the left wheel.
Steer machine in a maximum right turn and depress right brake pedal to stop the right YES: Go to next check.
wheel.
LISTEN: Can excessive gear noise be heard in the differential or pinion gear area? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-35/46

4-2-16 020113

PN=196
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


24 Front Wheel Alignment
(Toe-In) Check
YES: Go to next check.

T6264AI —UN—22OCT91
Drive machine in fourth gear forward on a surface with loose material.
LOOK: Is material from behind front wheels thrown excessively inward or outward? NO: See Toe-In Check and
Adjust. (Section 4-1.)
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-36/46


25 Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Driving Check (If
Equipped)

T131717B —UN—15JUN00
MFWD Switch
Engine speed slow idle.
Operator’s seat facing loader position.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Release park brake.
Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F) position.
Press and hold and then release the top half of the mechanical front wheel drive YES: Go to next check.
(MFWD) switch.
LOOK: Do the front wheels turn when the switch is pressed and stop when it is NO: See your authorized
released? dealer.
Press the bottom of the mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch to engage YES: Go to next check.
mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).
LOOK: Do the front wheel continue to turn. NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-37/46

4-2-17 020113

PN=197
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


26 Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Differential Check
CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-
nent. Use appropriate lifting device.

Raise machine off the ground.


Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Release park brake.
Shift transmission in first gear forward (1F).
Engage mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).
Lower front wheels to just contact ground. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does at least one front wheel turn? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-38/46


27 Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Gear and Pinion Check
Drive machine at transport speed with mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) engaged,
then disengage.

LISTEN: Does mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) “whine” when disengaged? YES: Go to next check.
NOTE: It is normal for mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) to “whine” NO: If mechanical front
when engaged at transport speeds. wheel drive (MFWD)
“whines”, check oil levels
and fill to correct level.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-39/46


28 Ride Control System
Check (If Equipped)
Run engine at fast idle.

Turn ride control ON.


Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.
Raise loader boom to maximum height.
Power boom down half-way to the ground.
Stop suddenly by releasing the joystick. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Is boom cushioned when joystick is released? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-40/46


29 Hydraulic Loader
Coupler Check (If
Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid unexpected movement. Position attachment
on ground before releasing pin.

Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.


Move coupler switch to disengage position.
LOOK/LISTEN: Do coupler pins retract?
LISTEN: Does chime sound? YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does coupler indicator light come ON? NO: See your authorized
dealer.

Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-41/46

4-2-18 020113

PN=198
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout


30 Steering System
Checks
Operator’s seat facing loader position.

Raise the loader bucket off the ground with the bottom level with the ground.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Operate engine at approximately 1000 rpm.
Turn the steering wheel full left to full right several times.
LOOK: Did the front wheels move smoothly in both directions? When the steering YES: Go to next check.
wheel was stopped, did the wheels stop moving?
NOTE: Internal leakage or a sticking steering valve spool can cause wheels to NO: Wheels did NOT move
continue to move after steering wheel is stopped. smoothly in both directions.
Wheels continued to
move after steering wheel
was stopped. See your
authorized dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-42/46


31 Cylinder Cushion
Check
Engine speed idle.

Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy compo-


nent. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Boom must be lowered from the transport position.
Activate backhoe swing left and right.
Make a note of the sound and speed as cylinders near end of their stroke.
LOOK: Does swing speed decrease near the end of the cylinder stroke? YES: Go to next check.
Repeat check using backhoe boom raise function. NO: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-43/46


32 Backhoe and Loader
Function Drift Check
Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.
Specification
Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C
140—160°F
Engine speed slow idle.
Position backhoe fully extended with bucket at a 45° angle to the ground.
Lower boom until the bucket cutting edge is 50 mm (2.0 in.) off the ground.
Position loader bucket the same distance off of the ground as backhoe bucket.
Observe both bucket cutting edges for 1 minute. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Are both bucket cutting edges still off the ground after 1 minute? NO: See your authorized
dealer.
Continued on next page MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-44/46

4-2-19 PN=199
020113
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

Cab System Checks


MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-45/46


1 Cab System Checks
Operational Checkout
Do the following work properly?

• Seat adjustment
• Seat belt
• Tilt wheel console
• Dome light
• Horn
• Front and rear windshield wiper and washer
• Four speed (five position) blower fan
• Air conditioning
• Heater
• Door and window latches
• Front and rear work lights
• Drive and brake lights
• Warning lights
• Turn signals
• Side shield latches
• Grill housing
• Fuel fill cap
• Loader boom lock check
• Backhoe boom lock check
• Service decal check
• Beacon (if equipped) YES: Operational checkout
complete.
• Auxiliary hydraulics (if equipped) NO: Repair.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-46/46

4-2-20 020113

PN=200
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1. Operational Checkout Procedure
NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the Step 2. Troubleshooting Charts
simplest to verify, to least likely, more difficult
to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use Step 3. Adjustments
all possible means to isolate the problem to a
single component or system. Use the following Step 4. See your authorized John Deere dealer.
steps to diagnose problems:
HG31779,0000020 -19-06MAY10-1/1

4-3-1 020113

PN=201
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Engine
Symptom Problem Solution

Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start Fuel tank empty Check fuel quantity.
or Starts Hard
Fuel tank vent plugged Remove cap and listen for sound of
air entering tank. Replace cap.

No electrical power to ECU Turn key switch to ON position.


Replace fuse. Repair wiring.

Water in fuel or water frozen in fuel line Drain water from fuel tank. Inspect
fuel filter for water. Change filter.

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for type
of fuel debris. Check bottom of fuel
tank for debris. Clean tank. Add fuel.
Check grade of fuel. Add correct fuel.

Air leak on suction side of fuel system Check for bubbles in fuel filter and
tighten connections. Inspect fuel lines
for damage.

Fuel transfer pump diaphragm leaking Check engine oil for fuel dilution.

Slow cranking speed Check battery and connections.


Incorrect engine oil (cold weather).

Restricted air filter Check air filter restriction indicator and


air filters. Clean.

Restricted fuel filter Replace fuel filter.

ECU fuse Replace fuse.

Engine Surges or Stalls Frequently Air in fuel Inspect filter for evidence of air in fuel.
Tighten connections and bleed fuel
system.

Fuel tank vent plugged Remove cap and listen for sound of
air entering tank. Replace cap.

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for
debris. Check bottom of fuel tank for
debris. Clean tank. Add fuel. Check
grade of fuel.

Water in fuel Drain fuel tank and inspect filter


element for water. Replace filters.

Fuel filter plugged Replace filter.

Improper valve clearance Check and adjust valve clearance.

Continued on next page HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-1/3

4-3-2 020113

PN=202
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Engine Misses Air in fuel Check for evidence of air in filter.


Tighten connections and bleed fuel
system.

Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank for water. Check fuel
tank strainer and fuel filter for debris.
Clean. Check grade of fuel.

Incorrect valve clearance Check and adjust valve clearance.

Engine Does Not Develop Power Fuel tank outlet strainer plugged Check fuel tank for water or debris.
Remove and clean.

Fuel filter plugged Replace fuel filter.

Wrong grade of fuel Drain and add correct fuel.

Air system restricted Check air filter restriction and air


filters. Clean.

Incorrect valve clearance Adjust valve clearance.

Engine Emits Excessive Black or Restricted air filter Check air filter restriction and air
Gray Exhaust Smoke filters. Clean or replace.

Incorrect grade of fuel Drain and add correct fuel.

Engine Emits Excessive Blue or Cranking speed too slow Check batteries and connections.
White Smoke
Incorrect grade of fuel Drain and add correct fuel.

Slow Acceleration Wrong grade of fuel Drain and add correct fuel.

Detonation (Excess Engine Knock) Low engine oil level Add oil.

Abnormal Engine Noise Low or incorrect engine oil (too thin) Add correct oil to proper level.

Engine oil diluted with fuel Inspect engine oil. See your
authorized dealer.

Low Oil Pressure (Oil Pressure Low oil level Add oil to proper level. Inspect engine
Light On—Red "Stop" Flashing) oil.

Wrong viscosity oil/oil diluted with Change oil and see your authorized
diesel fuel dealer.

Engine Overheats (Engine Coolant Low coolant level Fill cooling system and check for leaks.
Indicator Light On and Red "Stop"
Flashing)
Low engine oil level Add oil.

Engine overloaded, operating in Reduce load.


incorrect gear
Continued on next page HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-2/3

4-3-3 020113

PN=203
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Improper fuel Drain and add correct fuel.

Radiator cap Replace cap.

Excessive Fuel Consumption Air system restricted Check filter restriction indicator and
air filters. Replace.

Leakage in fuel system Inspect. Repair.

Incorrect grade of fuel Refill with correct fuel.

Operator holding hydraulics over relief Return control levers to neutral


position.

Excessive Drag In Turbocharger Bearing seizure or dirty or worn Check for plugged air filters.
Rotating Members bearings caused by excessive
temperature, unbalanced wheel,
dirty oil, oil starvation, or insufficient
lubrication
HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-3/3

4-3-4 020113

PN=204
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Electrical System
Symptom Problem Solution

Nothing Works Battery undercharged or dead See your authorized dealer.

Disconnect switch Check switch knob position.

Start fuse Replace fuse.

Battery cables making poor Clean cable connections at battery


connections and starter solenoid.

Power circuit components See your authorized dealer.

Starter Will Not Crank Engine Battery undercharged or dead See your authorized dealer.

Battery cables making poor connection Clean connections at battery, starter,


and ground to frame.

Starter relay problem See your authorized dealer.

Starter solenoid problem See your authorized dealer.

Starter motor problem See your authorized dealer.

Starter motor pinion stuck in flywheel Repair starter motor. See your
gear authorized dealer.

Key switch See your authorized dealer.

Major engine problem See your authorized dealer.

Engine Cranks Slowly Battery cable connections loose or Clean and/or tighten connections.
corroded
Batteries undercharged See your authorized dealer.

Starter armature bearings worn Repair or replace starter. See your


causing starter "drag" authorized dealer.

Starting Motor Turns, but Engine Starter pinion not engaging flywheel See your authorized dealer.
Will Not Crank ring gear
Starter pinion or flywheel gear teeth See your authorized dealer.
broken
Starting Motor Continues to Run Starter solenoid stuck See your authorized dealer.
after Engine Starts
Starter not disengaging See your authorized dealer.

Starter relay stuck See your authorized dealer.

Key switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness shorted See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-1/5

4-3-5 020113

PN=205
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Battery Using Too Much Water High ambient temperature Refill with distilled water.

Cracked battery case Replace battery. Install hold-down


correctly.

Battery being overcharged See your authorized dealer.

Low Battery Output Low water level See Battery Using Too Much Water in
this group.

Dirty or wet battery top, causing Clean battery and wipe dry.
discharge
Corroded or loose battery cable ends Clean and tighten cable end clamps.
Recharge battery. If machine has two
batteries, recharge separately.

Broken or loose battery posts Wiggle posts by hand. If posts are


loose or will turn, replace battery. If
machine has two batteries, replace
both batteries.

Loose fan/alternator belt or worn Inspect belt or pulley. Adjust or


pulleys replace as necessary.

Starter Solenoid Chatters Poor connections at batteries or starter Clean connections.

Low battery charge Recharge or replace batteries.

Starter solenoid "hold-in" windings See your authorized dealer.


open
Engine Cranks but Does Not Start Key switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Engine circuit electrical problem Check diagnostic trouble codes.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Start Aid Does Not Work Empty or misaligned start aid can A click, not a hiss, is heard when
start aid button is pushed. Replace or
adjust can.

Start aid switch See your authorized dealer.

Start aid solenoid See your authorized dealer.

Noisy Alternator Worn drive belt Inspect and replace.

Pulley misaligned Adjust alternator mount.

Alternator bearing worn Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley


by hand. If any roughness is felt,
repair alternator.

Continued on next page VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-2/5

4-3-6 020113

PN=206
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Internal alternator See your authorized dealer.

Display Monitor Does Not Work Display monitor fuse Replace fuse.

Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Wire harness or bad connection at See your authorized dealer.
Always Indicates HIGH bulkhead connector
Gauge See your authorized dealer.

Sender See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Torque Converter Oil Temperature Gauge See your authorized dealer.


Gauge Always Indicates HOT
Sender See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Fuel Gauge Does Not Work Fuel gauge problem See your authorized dealer.

Fuel gauge sender problem See your authorized dealer.

Display monitor problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Low oil level Stop engine. Check level.
Indicates Low
Low oil viscosity Drain and add correct oil.

Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Sender See your authorized dealer.

Engine Air Filter Restriction Restricted engine air filter Replace filter.
Indicator Light Stays On All the
Time
Engine air filter restriction switch See your authorized dealer.

Voltage Indicator Light Remains On Loose or glazed alternator belt Check belt. Replace if glazed; tighten
if loose.

Engine rpm low Raise engine rpm. If light remains on,


see your authorized dealer.

Excessive electrical load from added Remove accessories or install higher


accessories output alternator.

Continued on next page VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-3/5

4-3-7 020113

PN=207
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Loose or corroded electrical Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical


connections on battery, ground strap, connections.
starter or alternator
Alternator excitation diode See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Alternator problem See your authorized dealer.

Display monitor problem See your authorized dealer.

Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Restricted hydraulic oil filter Replace filter.
Indicator Light Stays On All the
Time
Hydraulic oil filter restriction switch See your authorized dealer.

Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.
Light Stays On All the Time
Sender See your authorized dealer.

Horn Does Not Sound Horn See your authorized dealer.

Horn fuse See your authorized dealer.

Horn switch See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Backup Alarm Does Not Sound Wiring harness See your authorized dealer.

Backup alarm See your authorized dealer.

Front or Rear Wiper Does Not Work Wiper fuse Replace fuse.

Wiper switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiper motor problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Blower Motor Does Not Work Blower motor fuse Replace fuse.

Fan motor switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Fan motor resistor problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Cab Work Lights Do Not Operate Fuse Replace fuse.

Light switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-4/5

4-3-8 020113

PN=208
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Cab work light relay problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Driving Lights Do Not Work Fuse Replace fuse.

Driving light switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Dome Light Does Not Work Bulb Replace bulb.

Fuse Replace fuse.

Dome light switch problem See your authorized dealer.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

Dim Lights Low battery charge Check battery connections.

Low alternator output Check belt tension.

Poor ground at lights Clean and tighten connections.

Return-to-Dig Does Not Operate Alternator excitation/Return-to-dig Replace fuse.


fuse
Boom switch out of adjustment Check cam to see if it activates switch.
Adjust as required.

Wiring harness problem See your authorized dealer.

VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-5/5

Steering System
Symptom Problem Solution

Slow or Hard Steering Air in system Check oil level.

Check suction hose clamps.

Steering lines or load sensing "LS" Check and replace.


lines damaged (bent)
Erratic ("Spongy") Steering Air in system Check oil level.

Check suction hose clamps.

No Response When Steering Wheel Low or no oil Check reservoir oil level.
Is Turned
VD76477,000126B -19-21DEC06-1/1

4-3-9 020113

PN=209
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Hydraulic System
Symptom Problem Solution

Reservoir Drains When Changing Return tube vent hole in reservoir may Remove, inspect and repair.
Hydraulic Filter be plugged
Vent tube broken off inside reservoir Remove and repair.

No Loader Or Steering Hydraulics Low oil level Add oil to correct level.

Pump problem Remove hydraulic filter and inspect. If


filter contains excessive amounts of
metal material, see your authorized
dealer.

Obstruction in oil lines or valves Inspect for pinched lines or stuck


valve spools.

Low Hydraulic Power Hydraulic oil aerated Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction
hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Low oil level Check oil levels.

Slow Hydraulic Functions Low oil level Add oil to correct level.

Engine rpm too low Increase rpm or check engine speed.


(See Check Engine Speed in this
manual.)

Hydraulic oil aerated Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction


hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Hose or line leakage Inspect and tighten fittings.

Slow Loader And Backhoe Hydraulic oil aerated Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction
Hydraulics (Low Pump Output) hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Low Hydraulic Power (Low Low oil level (no aeration of oil) Add oil to correct level.
Hydraulic Pressure)
Hydraulic oil aerated Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction
hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Hydraulic Function Makes Low oil level Add oil to correct level.
Chattering Noise
Hydraulic oil aerated Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction
hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.

Hydraulic Oil Overheats Excessive load Reduce load.

Operator holding hydraulic system Return levers to neutral when not in


over relief use.

Oil levels too low in reservoir Check levels and add oil. Use
recommended oil.

Continued on next page HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-1/2

4-3-10 020113

PN=210
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

Using low viscosity oil in hot weather Use recommended oil.

Hydraulic cooling system restricted Clean around radiators and coolers.

Plugged oil cooler Clean oil cooler.

Foaming Oil Oil level too low or too high Check oil level. Adjust to full mark on
sight gauge.

Incorrect type of oil Use recommended oil.

Oil maintenance not performed Perform correct maintenance.

Excessive Pump Noise Low oil level Add oil to correct level.

Hydraulic filter bypass valve chattering Replace filter. Inspect, clean, and
repair.

No Response When Steering Wheel Low oil level Check reservoir oil level.
Is Turned
Machine Turns In Opposite Steering cylinder lines not connected Connect steering cylinder lines to
Direction properly opposite ports.

HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-2/2

4-3-11 020113

PN=211
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Transmission
Symptom Problem Solution

Machine Will Not Move In Forward Low oil level in transmission Add oil to correct level.
or Reverse
Broken drive shafts Inspect drive shafts and universal
joints for external damage. See your
authorized dealer.

Transmission Slippage Low oil level Add oil.

Wrong oil grade Change oil.

Machine Lacks Power or Moves Oil level is low Add oil to correct level.
Slow
Wrong oil, aerated oil Change oil.

Brake dragging Check for excessive heat in brake


area of axle housing after operating
machine. See your authorized dealer.

Transmission Shifts Too Slow Low or high oil level (aeration of oil) Add oil or drain.

Wrong oil Change oil.

Transmission Overheats Oil level too high or too low Check oil level and correct.

Incorrect type of oil Drain and replace oil.

Oil cooler air flow restricted Inspect and clean exterior of cooler.
See your authorized dealer.

Transmission or coolant oil leak See your authorized dealer.

Fan or shroud damaged See your authorized dealer.

Excessive Power Train Noise Engine low idle too slow See your authorized dealer.

Oil level low Fill to correct oil level.

NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which


require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see your authorized dealer.
VD76477,000125F -19-21DEC06-1/1

MFWD
Symptom Problem Solution

Excessive Noise Oil level low Fill to correct oil level.

VD76477,0001260 -19-14NOV06-1/1

4-3-12 020113

PN=212
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Rear Axle
Symptom Problem Solution

No Differential Lock Operation Problem in electrical circuit to solenoid With engine stopped and key switch
turn to accessory, activate differential
lock and listen for a click from solenoid
valve.

Do Differential Lock Operational


Checks.

Differential Lock Will Not Release Stuck foot switch Inspect.

Problem in electrical circuit With engine stopped and key switch


on, activate differential lock and listen
for a click from solenoid valve.

Poor Service Brakes Air in brake valve or lines or piston Bleed brakes. See Brake Bleeding
Procedure. (Section 4-1.)

Low oil level Check oil level and fill.

Excessive Noise/Heat Low oil level Check oil level and fill.

Park Brake Will Not Engage Tow release screws turned in See your authorized dealer.

NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which


require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see your authorized dealer.
VD76477,0001261 -19-06MAY10-1/1

4-3-13 020113

PN=213
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Air Conditioning
Symptom Problem Solution

Air Conditioning System Does Not A/C and heater blower fuse Replace fuse.
Operate
Blower motor switch Check switch.

A/C and heater ON/OFF switch Check switch.

A/C and heater relay Check relay.

Air Conditioner Does Not Cool Fresh air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.
Interior of Cab
Condenser fins restricted with debris Clean condenser fins.

Recirculating air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.

Refrigerant hose kinked, pinched or Check hose routing.


collapsed
Heater or evaporator core fins Clean heater or evaporator core fins.
restricted with dirt or dust
A/C and heater blower motor failed or Check blower motor.
operating too slowly
Warm outside air leaking into cab Inspect, repair or replace door and
window seals.

Heater valve remaining open Inspect, repair, adjust or replace


heater valve or cable.

Air Conditioner Runs Constantly, Freeze control switch, capillary tube Reposition capillary tube in evaporator
Too Cold not positioned in evaporator properly coil.

Interior Windows Continue to Fog Fresh air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.

A/C system off Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to


A/C position.

Symptom Problem Solution

Heater System Does Not Operate A/C and heater blower fuse Replace fuse.

Blower motor switch/Blower motor fan Check switch.


switch (if equipped)
Heater Does Not Warm Interior of Fresh air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.
Cab
Recirculating air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.

Heater hose kinked, pinched or Re-route or re-index hoses. Replace


collapsed collapsed hoses.

Heater coil fins clogged with dirt or Clean heater fins.


dust

Continued on next page VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-1/2

4-3-14 020113

PN=214
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

A/C and heater blower motor/Heater Check motor.


blower motor (if equipped) failed or
operating too slowly
Heater valve remaining closed Inspect, repair, adjust or replace
heater valve or cable.

Interior Windows Continue to Fog Fresh air filter restricted Clean or replace filter.

A/C system off (if equipped) Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to
A/C position.

VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-2/2

4-3-15 020113

PN=215
Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage 3. Wash the machine. [Use low pressure wash
operations (less than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi)
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage, do not use until 30 days after receipt of machine.] Paint areas to
biodiesel during machine storage. When prevent rust. Replace decals, where needed.
using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum
diesel for long term storage. 4. Fill fuel tank, to prevent condensation.

1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one 5. Ensure tires are properly inflated.
complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the 6. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tires from
fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during freezing to ground.
storage to prevent water build up due to condensation.
IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy
NOTE: For blends up to and including B20, it is painted finish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust
recommended that biodiesel be used within three Inhibitor on painted surfaces.
months of its manufacture. For blends greater
than B20, it is recommended that the biodiesel 7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. If not, coat
be used within 45 days. The poor oxidation exposed cylinder rods with LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor.
stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in
long-term storage problems. John Deere does not 8. Apply grease at all lubrication fittings.
recommend using biodiesel in engines powering
standby applications or vehicles operating on a 9. Remove batteries or disconnect terminals from
seasonal basis. Consult your John Deere dealer or batteries.
fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel storage 10. Store machine in a dry, protected place.
and performance of biodiesel fuels. These additives
must be added to the biodiesel close to its time IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage
of production for them to be effective. from unauthorized persons operating machine.
Attach a DO NOT OPERATE tag to steering wheel.
2. Repair worn or damaged parts. Install new parts, if
necessary, to avoid needless delays later. 11. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: High pressure washing [greater than 12. Close all vent louvers in the cab.
1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi)] can damage freshly
13. Lock all covers and doors.
painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to
air dry for 30 days minimum after receipt of
machine before cleaning parts or machine
with high pressure. Use low pressure wash
operations until 30 days have elapsed.
LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corporation.
VD76477,00015C2 -19-06MAR12-1/1

Monthly Storage Procedure

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death


from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes
can cause sickness or death. Start engine
ONLY in a well-ventilated area.
T6191AA —UN—18OCT88

1. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank when air


temperature is above freezing.
2. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with
a cleaning solvent.

LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works.


Continued on next page VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-1/2

4-4-1 020113

PN=216
Miscellaneous—Storage

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.


During cold temperatures, check fluidity of
engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy
and/or jelly-like rather than liquid, DO NOT
attempt to start engine. Use external heat source
to warm the crankcase until oil appears fluid.

T6181AU —UN—18OCT88
3. Check all fluid levels. If low, check for leaks and add
oil as required.
4. Check belts.
5. Check condition of all hoses and connections.
6. Check battery electrolyte level. Charge and install
battery.
run until it reaches operating temperature. Run at 1/2
7. For machines with tires, check condition of tires and speed for five minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle.
tire pressure.
• If engine fails to start or runs poorly after starting,
For machines with tracks, check condition of tracks change fuel filter(s). Bleed fuel system.
and track sag.
12. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc.
On crawler machines with non sealed-and-lubricated
track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints. Run CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
machine back and forth several times. unexpected machine movement. Clear the
8. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from area of all persons before running machine
freezing to ground. through the operation procedure.

9. Fill fuel tank. 13. Make sure the area is clear to allow for movement.
Cycle all hydraulic functions several times. Check
10. Pre-lubricate turbocharger bearings, if equipped:
condition of all hoses and connections.
a. Disconnect fuel shutoff fuse.
14. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if
b. Crank engine for 10 seconds. possible. Turn key switch to OFF.
c. Connect fuel shutoff fuse. 15. Apply LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod
areas.
11. Inspect engine compartment, and remove any foreign
material that may have accumulated. Start engine and
VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-2/2

4-4-2 020113

PN=217
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identification Number (PIN)
Purchase Date

Product Identification Number

NOTE: Record all 13 characters of Product

T132526B —UN—13JUL00
Identification Number.

A—Product Identification
Number Tag

CED,OUO1079,460 -19-13JUL00-1/1

Record Engine Serial Number


Engine Serial Number

A—Engine Serial Number Tag

TX1014141A —UN—26OCT06
VD76477,0001148 -19-09NOV06-1/1

Record Transmission Serial Number


Transmission Serial Number

A—Transmission Serial

TX1003410A —UN—07FEB06
Number Tag

VD76477,0001149 -19-25OCT06-1/1

4-5-1 020113

PN=218
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number


Rear Axle Housing Serial Number

A—Rear Axle Serial Number

TX1003412A —UN—07FEB06
Tag

VD76477,000125B -19-13NOV06-1/1

Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive


(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial
Number—If Equipped
MFWD Front Axle Housing Serial Number

TX1014904A —UN—21NOV06
A—Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Front Axle
Serial Number Tag

VD76477,000124B -19-14DEC06-1/1

Keep Proof of Ownership


1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.

TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine

DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1

4-5-2 020113

PN=219
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Keep Machines Secure


1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difficult

TS230 —UN—24MAY89
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1

4-5-3 020113

PN=220
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Travel Speeds
Travel speeds are as follows for machines using 19.5L-24
rear tires:
Item Measurement Specification
Travel Speeds
1 Forward Speed 5.7 km/hr
3.5 mph
2 Forward Speed 10.5 km/hr
6.5 mph
3 Forward Speed 21.3 km/hr
13.2 mph
4 Forward Speed 35.9 km/hr
22.3 mph
1 Reverse Speed 7.2 km/hr
4.5 mph
2 Reverse Speed 13.2 km/hr
8.2 mph
3 Reverse (310SJ only) Speed 21.1 km/hr
13.1 mph
NOTE: Heavily equipped machines and smaller tires
may result in slower travel speeds.
VD76477,0001150 -19-05FEB08-1/1

Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities


Item Measurement Specification
Cooling System
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine Capacity 25 L
6.6 gal
Tier 2/Stage II Engine Capacity 21 L
5.5 gal
Item Measurement Specification

Engine Oil (including filter) Capacity 13 L


3.5 gal
Torque Converter and Transmission Capacity 15 L
System 4.0 gal
Rear Axle and Planetary Housing Capacity 18 L
4.8 gal
MFWD Front Axle Housing Capacity 6.5 L
1.7 gal
MFWD Front Wheel Planetary Capacity 1L
Housing (each) 1 qt
Fuel Tank Capacity 155 L
41 gal
Hydraulic System Reservoir Capacity 39 L
10.3 gal
MD04263,000014F -19-07MAY09-1/1

4-6-1 020113

PN=221
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions

T115805 —UN—11JUN98

Item Measurement Specification


A—Loading Height, Truck
Loading Position
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.33 m
10 ft 11 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.38 m
Retracted 11 ft 1 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Height 4.24 m
Extended 13 ft 11 in.

Continued on next page VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-1/4

4-6-2 020113

PN=222
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification


B—Reach from Center of
Swing Pivot
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.44 m
17 ft 10 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.51 m
Retracted 18 ft 1 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.53 m
Extended 21 ft 5 in.
C—Reach from Center of
Rear Axle
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.50 m
21 ft 4 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.58 m
Retracted 21 ft 7 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 7.59 m
Extended 24 ft 11 in.
D—Maximum Digging Depth
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Depth 4.34 m
14 ft 3 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Depth 4.39 m
Retracted 14 ft 5 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Depth 5.46 m
Extended 17 ft 11 in.
E—Digging Depth (SAE)—610
mm (2 ft) Flat Bottom
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.32 m
14 ft 2 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.37 m
Retracted 14 ft 4 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.44 m
Extended 17 ft 10 in.
F—Digging Depth (SAE)—2440
mm (8 ft) Flat Bottom
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 3.96 m
13 ft 0 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.06 m
Retracted 13 ft 4 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.18 m
Extended 17 ft 0 in.
G—Ground Clearance Minimum
Ground Clearance Minimum Distance 305 mm
12 in.
H—Bucket Rotation
Bucket Rotation Rotation 190°

Continued on next page VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-2/4

4-6-3 020113

PN=223
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification


I—Transport Height
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.43 m
11 ft 3 in.
J—Overall Length, Transport
Backhoe Length 7.09 m
23 ft 3 in.
K—Stabilizer Width, Transport
with ROPS
Backhoe Width 2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating
Backhoe Width 3.10 m
10 ft 2 in.
M—Overall Width, Stabilizer
Spread (less loader bucket)
Backhoe Width 3.53 m
11 ft 7 in.
N—Width Over Tires
Backhoe Width 2.08 m
6 ft 10 in.
O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top
Backhoe Height 2.74 m
9 ft 0 in.
P—Front Axle Centerline to
Bucket Cutting Edge
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Length 2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Length 2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Length 2.18 m
yd3) 7 ft 2 in.
Multipurpose 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Length 2.15 m
7 ft 1 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Length 2.20 m
7 ft 3 in.
Q—Wheelbase
Non-Powered Front Axle Length 2.11 m
6 ft 11 in.
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Axle Length 2.14 m
7 ft 0 in.
R—Maximum Height to Loader
Bucket Hinge Pin
Maximum Height to Loader Bucket Height 3.38 m
Hinge Pin 11 ft 1 in.

Continued on next page VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-3/4

4-6-4 020113

PN=224
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification


S—Dump Clearance, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Clearance 2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Clearance 2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Clearance 2.48 m
yd3) 8 ft 2 in.
Multipurpose 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Clearance 2.59 m
8 ft 6 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Clearance 2.59 m
8 ft 6 in.
T—Maximum Loader Bucket
Dump Angle
Maximum Loader Bucket Dump Angle 45°
Angle
U—Reach at Full Height, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Distance 785 mm
30.9 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Distance 767 mm
830.2 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Distance 809 mm
yd3) 31.9 in.
Multipurpose 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Distance 818 mm
32.2 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Distance 818 mm
32.2 in.
V—Loader Bucket Rollback
at Ground Level
Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground Angle 40°
Level
W—Dig Below Ground—Loader
Bucket Level
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Depth 160 mm
6.3 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Depth 175 mm
6.9 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Depth 147 mm
yd3) 5.8 in.
Multipurpose 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Depth 197 mm
7.8 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Depth 197 mm
7.8 in.
VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-4/4

4-6-5 020113

PN=225
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310J Backhoe Loader Specifications


NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with Standards.

Item Measurement Specification


Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine—John
Deere 4045H
Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm Power 84 hp
Cylinders Quantity 4
Displacement Volume 4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise Torque 47%
Maximum Engine Net Torque @ Torque 367 N·m
1300 rpm 270 lb-ft
Electrical System Voltage 12-volt
Alternator Rating Amperage 90 amps
Oil Pan Size Capacity 0.20 L/kW
Tier 2/Stage II Engine—John
Deere 4045T
Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm Power 79 hp
Cylinders Quantity 4
Displacement Volume 4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise Torque 34%
Maximum Engine Net Torque @ Torque 335 N·m
1400 rpm 246 lb-ft
Electrical System Voltage 12-volt
Alternator Rating Amperage 90 amps
Engine—John Deere
4045D—Naturally Aspirated
Rated Power @ 2000 rpm Power SAE gross 53 kW
71 hp
Cylinders Quantity 4
Displacement Volume 4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise Torque 37%
Maximum Engine Net Torque @ Torque 283 N·m
1000 rpm 208 lb-ft
Electrical System Voltage 12-volt
Alternator Rating Amperage 90 amps
MD04263,0000150 -19-07JUL09-1/1

4-6-6 020113

PN=226
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310J Backhoe Loader Weight


Item Measurement Specification
Transporting
SAE Operating Weight with ROPS Weight 6295 kg
13 880 lb
Cab Added Weight 263 kg
580 lb
MFWD with Tires Added Weight 168 kg
370 lb
Extendible Dipperstick Weight 200 kg
440 lb
Front Loader Coupler Weight 286 kg
630 lb
Backhoe Bucket Coupler Weight 59 kg
130 lb
MD04263,0000151 -19-20FEB09-1/1

310J Buckets
Width Heaped Capacity Weight
Loader: mm (In.) m3 (Cu Yd) kg lb
Heavy duty long lip 2180 (86) 0.86 (1.12) 426 (940)
2180 (86) 0.86 (1.12) 426 (940)
Multipurpose 2180 (86) 0.76 (1.00) 725 (1600)

Width Heaped Capacity Weight


Backhoe: mm (in.) m3 (cu ft) kg (lb)
Standard duty 457 (18) 0.13 (4.6) 118 (260)
610 (24) 0.18 (6.5) 136 (300)
Heavy duty with lift loops 305 (12) 0.11 (2.8) 109 (240)
457 (18) 0.13 (4.6) 132 (290)
610 (24) 0.18 (6.5) 154 (340)
762 (30) 0.25 (8.8) 172 (380)

VD76477,00010DB -19-09JUL09-1/1

4-6-7 020113

PN=227
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310J Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Standard Dipperstick
16 5
Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin,
4,859 (2204) 3,232 (1466) 4
loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift 12
capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are 4,420 (2005) 3,123 (1417) 3
87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing 4,446 (2017) 3,002 (1362) 8
arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle 4,968 (2253)
DIPPER
2,875 (1304) 2
between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is 7,656 (3473) LIFT
WITH
2,758 (1251) 4
1
equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard BOOM 2,645 (1200)
AT 65
or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment. 2,545 (1154) 0 0
SWING PIVOT
2,453 (1113)
NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves 1
BOOM 2,366 (1073) 4
side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the LIFT
2,292 (1040)
side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected. 2

TX1015209 —19—09JAN07
2,236 (1014) 8
2,223 (1008) 3
12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010DD -19-16OCT06-1/1

310J Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
16 5
(Retracted)
4
Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin, 4,437 (2013) 2,867 (1300) 12
loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift 4,050 (1837) 2,775 (1259) 3
capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are 4,067 (1845) 2,662 (1207) 8
87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing 4,533 (2056) 2,545 (1154) 2
DIPPER
arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle 6,525
(2960)
LIFT
WITH
2,432 (1103) 4
1
between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is BOOM
AT 65
2,327 (1056)
equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard SWING PIVOT
2,227 (1010) 0 0
or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment. 2,136 (969)
BOOM 2,058 (933) 4 1
NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves LIFT
1,984 (900)
side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the 2

TX1015210 —19—12DEC06
1,931 (876) 8
side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected.
1,914 (868) 3
12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010DE -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-8 020113

PN=228
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310J Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
16 5
(Extended)
2,841 (1289) 1,966 (892) 4
Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin, 12
loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift 2,723 (1235) 1,936 (878) 3
capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are 2,723 (1235) 1,892 (858) 8
87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing 2,858 (1296) 1,844 (836) 2
DIPPER
arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle 3,176 (1441) LIFT 1,792 (813) 4
1
WITH
between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is 3,919 (1778) BOOM 1,740 (789)
AT 65
equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard SWING PIVOT
1,697 (770) 0 0
or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment. 1,653 (750)
BOOM 1,614 (732) 4 1
NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves LIFT
1,579 (716)
side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the 2

TX1015211 —19—09JAN07
1,557 (706) 8
side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected.
1,549 (703) 3
1,575 (714) 12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010DF -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-9 020113

PN=229
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310SJ Dimensions

T115805 —UN—11JUN98

NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change rear tires; 11L-16, 12PR, F3 front tires; 0.86
without notice. Whenever applicable, specifications m3 (1.12 cu yd) loader bucket; 610 mm (24 in.)
are in accordance with SAE Standards. Unless backhoe bucket; ROPS/FOPS; full fuel tank
otherwise noted, these specifications are based and 79 kg (175 lb) operator.
on a standard machine with 19.5L-24, 8PR, R4

Item Measurement Specification


A—Loading Height, Truck
Loading Position
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.43 m
11 ft 3 in.
Continued on next page VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-1/5

4-6-10 020113

PN=230
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification

Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.43 m


Retracted 11 ft 3 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Height 4.29 m
Extended 14 ft 1 in.
B—Reach from Center of
Swing Pivot
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.56 m
18 ft 3 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.66 m
Retracted 18 ft 7 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.68 m
Extended 21 ft 11 in.
C—Reach from Center of
Rear Axle
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.63 m
21 ft 9 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 6.73 m
Retracted 22 ft 1 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 7.72 m
Extended 25 ft 4 in.
D—Maximum Digging Depth
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Depth 4.42 m
14 ft 6 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Depth 4.55 m
Retracted 14 ft 11 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Depth 5.61 m
Extended 18 ft 5 in.
E—Digging Depth (SAE)—610
mm (2 ft) Flat Bottom
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.37 m
14 ft 4 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.50 m
Retracted 14 ft 9 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.56 m
Extended 18 ft 3 in.
F—Digging Depth (SAE)—2440
mm (8 ft) Flat Bottom
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.06 m
13 ft 4 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 4.19 m
Retracted 13 ft 9 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Distance 5.33 m
Extended 17 ft 6 in.
G—Ground Clearance Minimum
Ground Clearance Minimum Clearance 330 mm
13 in.
Continued on next page VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-2/5

4-6-11 020113

PN=231
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification


H—Bucket Rotation
Bucket Rotation Rotation 190°
I—Transport Height
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.51 m
11 ft 6 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick Height 3.48 m
Retracted 11 ft 5 in.
J—Overall Length, Transport
Backhoe Length 7.16 m
23 ft 6 in.
K—Stabilizer Width, Transport
Backhoe Width 2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating
Backhoe Width 3.10 m
10 ft 2 in.
M—Overall Width, Stabilizer
Spread (less loader bucket)
Backhoe Width 3.53 m
11 ft 7 in.
N—Width Over Tires
Backhoe Width 2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top
Backhoe Height 2.79 m
9 ft 2 in.
P—Front Axle Centerline to
Bucket Cutting Edge
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Length 2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Length 2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Length 2.18 m
yd3) 7 ft 2 in.
Heavy Duty 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Length 2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Length 2.20 m
7 ft 3 in.
Multipurpose 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Length 2.15 m
7 ft 1 in.
Q—Wheelbase
Non-Powered Front Axle Length 2.11 m
6 ft 11 in.
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Length 2.14 m
7 ft 0 in.

Continued on next page VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-3/5

4-6-12 020113

PN=232
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification


R—Maximum Height to Loader
Bucket Hinge Pin
Maximum Height to Loader Bucket Height 3.4 m
Hinge Pin 11 ft 2 in.
S—Dump Clearance, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Clearance 2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Clearance 2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Clearance 2.48 m
yd3) 8 ft 2 in.
Heavy Duty 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Clearance 2.64 m
8 ft 8 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Clearance 2.62 m
8 ft 7 in.
Multipurpose 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Clearance 2.62 m
8 ft 7 in.
T—Maximum Loader Bucket
Dump Angle
Maximum Loader Bucket Dump Angle 45°
Angle
U—Reach at Full Height, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Distance 785 mm
30.9 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Distance 767 mm
30.2 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Distance 911 mm
yd3) 35.9 in.
Heavy Duty 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Distance 765 mm
30.1 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Distance 818 mm
32.2 in.
Multipurpose 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Distance 818 mm
32.2 in.
V—Loader Bucket Rollback
at Ground Level
Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground Angle 40°
Level
W—Dig Below Ground—Loader
Bucket Level
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3) Depth 160 mm
6.3 in.
Heavy Duty 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) Depth 175 mm
6.9 in.

Continued on next page VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-4/5

4-6-13 020113

PN=233
Miscellaneous—Specifications

Item Measurement Specification

3
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m (1.25 Depth 147 mm
yd3) 5.8 in.
Heavy Duty 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Depth 206 mm
8.1 in.
Multipurpose 0.96 m3 (1.25 yd3) Depth 185 mm
7.3 in.
Multipurpose 1.00 m3 (1.31 yd3) Depth 185 mm
7.3 in.
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-5/5

310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight


Item Measurement Specification
Transporting
SAE Operating Weight with ROPS Weight 6580 kg
14 510 lb
Cab Added Weight 263 kg
580 lb
MFWD with Tires Added Weight 220 kg
485 lb
Extendible Dipperstick Weight 222 kg
490 lb
Front Loader Coupler Weight 286 kg
630 lb
Backhoe Bucket Coupler Weight 63 kg
138 lb
MD04263,0000153 -19-20FEB09-1/1

4-6-14 020113

PN=234
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310SJ Buckets
Width Heaped Capacity Weight
Loader: mm In. m3 Cu Yd kg lb
Heavy duty long lip 2180 86 0.86 1.12 426 940
2340 92 1.00 1.30 476 1050
Multipurpose 2180 86 0.76 1.00 725 1600
2340 92 0.96 1.25 762 1680

Width Heaped Capacity Weight


Backhoe: mm In. m3 Cu Ft kg lb
Standard duty 610 24 0.21 7.5 159 350
Heavy duty with lift loops 305 12 0.09 3.3 117 258
457 18 0.14 5.1 151 334
610 24 0.21 7.5 180 396
610 24 0.25 8.8 216 476
762 30 0.28 10.0 202 444
914 36 0.35 12.5 231 510
Severe duty 457 18 0.14 5.1 164 362
610 24 0.21 7.5 192 424
610 24 0.25 8.8 206 455
762 30 0.28 10.0 215 475
Ditch cleaning 914 36 0.35 12.5 231 510

VD76477,00010E3 -19-13JUL09-1/1

310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Standard Dipperstick 16 5
Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin, 4
loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift 5,585 (2533) 3,745 (1699) 12
capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are 5,664 (2569) 3,658 (1659) 3
87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing 5,785 (2624) 3,537 (1604) 8
arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle 6,609 (2998) DIPPER 3,406 (1545) 2
LIFT
between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is 11,389 (5166) WITH 3,276 (1486) 4
1
BOOM
equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard AT 65 3,154 (1431)
or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment. 3,045 (1381) 0 0
SWING PIVOT
2,945 (1336)
NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves 1
BOOM 2,854 (1295) 4
side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the LIFT
2,780 (1261)
side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected. 2

TX1015212 —19—12DEC06
2,723 (1235) 8
2,732 (1239) 3
12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010E4 -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-15 020113

PN=235
Miscellaneous—Specifications

310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick 16 5
(Retracted)
4,384 (1989) 4
3,119 (1415) 12
4,981 3,119 (1415)
(2259) 3
5,078 (2303) 3,049 (1383) 8
5,712 (2591) 2,958 (1342) 2
DIPPER
8,334 LIFT 2,862 (1298) 4
WITH 1
(3780) BOOM
AT 65
2,771 (1257)
2,684 (1217) 0 0
SWING PIVOT
2,606 (1182)
BOOM 2,536 (1150) 4 1
LIFT
2,484 (1127) 2

TX1015213 —19—12DEC06
2,462 (1117) 8
2,514 (1140) 3
3,306 (1500) 12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010E5 -19-16OCT06-1/1

310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting


Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick 16 5
(Extended)
2,674 (1213)
4
2,184 (991) 12

2,945 (1335) 2,197 (997) 3


3,155 (1431) 2,188 (992) 8
3,373 (1530) 2,158 (979) 2
DIPPER
3,691 (1674) LIFT 2,127 (965) 4
WITH 1
4,390 (1991) BOOM 2,092 (949)
AT 65
2,053 (931) 0 0
2,023 (918)
BOOM 1,997 (906) 4 1
LIFT
1,975 (896)
2

TX1015214 —19—12DEC06
1,971 (894) 8
1,988 (902) 3
2,058 (933) 12
4

FEET 0 4 8 12 16 20
METERS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted


Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)

VD76477,00010E6 -19-16OCT06-1/1

4-6-16 020113

PN=236
Index
Page Page

A Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow


Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18
Accessory outlets, 12-volt........................................ 2-1-21 Bucket teeth installation ....................................... 4-1-27
Accumulator Counterweights
Ride control, checking.......................................... 4-1-18 Frame ............................................................... 4-1-16
Acid Liquid, in front tires ........................................... 4-1-17
Battery, check electrolyte level............................... 3-7-2 Lubricate
Adjustment Pivots and cylinders .................................3-4-7, 3-4-8
Engine valve clearance........................................ 3-10-1 Stabilizers........................................................... 3-4-6
Air Operating
Cleaner elements clean ...............................3-3-7, 3-3-8 Auxiliary hydraulic functions ............................. 2-2-19
Air cleaner, engine Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow ...................... 2-2-18
Elements, replace ........................................3-9-3, 3-9-4 Boom lock......................................................... 2-2-10
Intake hose ............................................................ 3-8-1 ISO excavator two-lever controls ..................... 2-2-13
Air conditioning ........................................................ 4-3-14 John Deere two-lever controls.......................... 2-2-12
Controls....................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17 Stabilizers........................................................... 2-2-9
Receiver-dryer ....................................................... 4-1-3 Swing lock ........................................................ 2-2-11
Alternator Swing lock pin .................................................. 2-2-11
Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3 Stabilizers
Precaution.............................................................. 4-1-5 Lubrication.......................................................... 3-4-6
Anti-theft security system Reversing feet .................................................. 4-1-16
Configuration.......................................................... 2-1-4 Backhoe coupler
Operation ............................................................... 2-1-6 Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Attachments Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Adding safely ......................................................... 1-3-4 Safety signs ........................................................... 1-5-3
Operating safely..................................................... 1-3-4 Backhoe Loader
Axle Weight
Front, non-powered 310J.................................................................... 4-6-7
Lubricate oscillating pivot and steering 310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14
pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10 Backover accidents
Lubricate wheel bearings ................................... 3-3-9 Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3
MFWD Ballast
Change oil, housing.......................................... 3-10-2 Counterweights, front of frame............................. 4-1-16
Change oil, planetary ....................................... 3-10-2 Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17
Check oil, housing .............................................. 3-7-1 Batteries
Check oil, planetary............................................ 3-7-1 Boost starting ......................................................... 4-1-6
Lubricate drive shaft splines............................... 3-3-8 Using battery charger............................................. 4-1-6
Lubricate oscillating pivot and universal joints ... 3-4-9 Battery
Operating.......................................................... 2-2-24 Acid
Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-12 Burns from battery acid ...................................... 3-7-2
Rear Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-7-2
Oil change ........................................................ 3-10-3 Explosion ............................................................... 3-7-2
Operating differential lock................................. 2-2-24 Handling, checking, servicing ................................ 4-1-7
Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-13 Rating..................................................................... 4-1-8
Axles Removal................................................................. 4-1-9
Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11 Replacement.......................................................... 4-1-8
Terminals................................................................ 3-7-2
Bearings, front wheel................................................. 3-9-1
B Belt inspection ........................................................... 3-9-5
Bleed fuel system .................................................... 4-1-21
Backhoe
Bleediing procedure
Adjustment
Brakes.................................................................. 4-1-22
Boom lock........................................................... 4-1-2
Bolt and screw torque values
Boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque.................... 3-8-1
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30
Auxiliary hydraulic function
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29
Adjusting flow control valve .............................. 2-2-18
Boom
Auxiliary hydraulic functions
Lowering .............................................................. 4-1-20
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19

Continued on next page

Index-1 020113

PN=1
Index

Page Page

Boom lock Cooling system


Backhoe ................................................................. 4-1-2 Check..................................................................... 3-4-3
Brake Draining.................................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2
Park brake Filling........................................................ 3-11-3, 3-11-4
Check ............................................................... 4-1-20 Service safely......................................................... 1-4-1
Service brake COOLSCAN PLUS test kit....................................... 3-3-10
Inspection, external ............................................ 4-1-1 Counterweights
Brakes Frame................................................................... 4-1-16
Bleediing procedure ............................................. 4-1-22 Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17
Break-in Coupler, backhoe
Engine.................................................................... 3-6-1 Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Break-In engine oil..................................................... 3-1-6 Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Breather, fuel Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6 Coupler, loader
Breather, hydraulic reservoir...................................... 3-9-2 Grease ................................................................... 3-4-9
Bucket Coupler, Loader
Backhoe Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22
Installing teeth .................................................. 4-1-27 Cruise control ............................................................ 2-2-9
Front loader Cylinder service ....................................................... 4-1-27
Changing buckets............................................. 4-1-15
Bucket specification D
310J ....................................................................... 4-6-7
310SJ................................................................... 4-6-15 Decals
Bulb replacement, halogen lights ............................ 4-1-13 Safety..................................................................... 1-5-1
Defroster controls ........................................2-1-13, 2-1-17
C Diagnose malfunctions
Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1
Cab air filters ...................................................3-3-4, 3-9-4 Diagnostic trouble codes ........................................... 2-1-9
Capacities Messages, standard display monitor (SDM) .......... 2-1-8
Drain and refill........................................................ 4-6-1 Diesel fuel........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Checklist .................................................................... 3-2-7 Sample................................................................... 3-8-6
Codes Diesel fuel, testing
Standard display monitor ....................................... 2-1-9 Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-4
Cold weather Differential lock ........................................................ 2-2-24
Machine warm-up .................................................. 2-2-6 Dipperstick, extendible
Starting................................................................... 2-2-4 Lock
Controls Operation.......................................................... 2-2-17
Backhoe, ISO excavator two-lever Drain engine coolant.................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-13 Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant
Backhoe, John Deere two-lever Diesel Engine Coolant, Drain Intervals ................ 3-1-13
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-12 Driving
Steering console Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20
Locations .......................................................... 2-1-14 Driving the machine................................................... 2-2-7
Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20
Coolant E
Add coolant extender ........................................... 3-3-10
Additional information .......................................... 3-1-15 Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines
Check.........................................................3-3-10, 3-9-8 Diesel Engines, Cold Weather Effect..................... 3-1-5
Diesel engine ....................................................... 3-1-12 Electrical
Drain ........................................................ 3-11-1, 3-11-2 Accessory outlets, 12-volt .................................... 2-1-21
Heater .................................................................... 2-2-5 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-5
Hoses..................................................................... 4-1-4 Element
John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender ......... 3-1-13 Primary
Level ...................................................................... 3-4-3 Cleaning and inspecting ..................................... 4-1-3
Sample................................................................... 3-8-6 Secondary
Supplemental additives........................................ 3-1-14 Inspecting and cleaning...................................... 4-1-3
Test ...................................................................... 3-3-10 Emissions control warranty statement............................ -3
Testing.................................................................. 3-1-16 Enable/disable switch
Warm temperature climates................................. 3-1-14 Pilot control .......................................................... 2-1-15

Continued on next page

Index-2 020113

PN=2
Index

Page Page

Engine Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15


Air filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3 Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6
Alternator voltage indicator .................................... 2-1-3 Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23
Break-in........................................................2-2-3, 3-6-1 Ride control
Coolant heater ....................................................... 2-2-5 Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18
Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-1-3 Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19
Crankcase vent tube .............................................. 3-8-6 Front wheel drive
Filter service intervals Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11
Tier 2/Stage II..................................................... 3-1-8 Fuel
Tier 3/Stage III A .............................................. 3-1-10 Diesel ...........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Hood, opening and closing .................................... 3-2-5 Filter
Identification........................................................... 3-2-2 Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5
Oil change.............................................................. 3-8-3 Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2
Oil check ................................................................ 3-4-2 Level gauge ........................................................... 2-1-3
Oil filter................................................................... 3-8-3 Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-1
Oil pressure indicator ............................................. 2-1-3 Tank
Oil specification Capacity ............................................................. 3-2-5
Break-In.............................................................. 3-1-6 Drain water and sediment .................................. 3-8-2
Tier 2 and Stage II.............................................. 3-1-7 Fuel breather
Tier 3 and Stage III A ......................................... 3-1-9 Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1 Fuel filter
Starting................................................................... 2-2-3 Auxliary water separator ........................................ 3-8-5
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2 Fuel Filter
Valve clearance adjust ......................................... 3-10-1 Auxiliary water separator ....................................... 3-3-6
Engine speed Fuel system, bleed .................................................. 4-1-21
Control knob......................................................... 2-1-16 Fuses
Engine speed control knob ............................2-1-16, 2-2-9 Location ................................................................. 4-1-9
Extendible dipperstick
Lock operation ..................................................... 2-2-17 G
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-16
Extendible dipperstick w/ attachments Gauge
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-17 Engine coolant temperature................................... 2-1-3
Fuel level................................................................ 2-1-3
F Transmission and torque converter oil
temperature.......................................................... 2-1-3
Feet, stabilizer Grease
Reversing............................................................. 4-1-16 Alternative and synthetic lubricants ....................... 3-1-6
Filter Axle
Cab air MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8
Clean and replace elements.....................3-3-4, 3-9-4 MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9
Engine air cleaner Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9
Replace elements.....................................3-9-3, 3-9-4 Axle, non-powered front
Engine oil Oscillating pivot and steering
Replace element ................................................ 3-8-3 pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10
Fuel Backhoe
Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5 Pivots and cylinders .................................3-4-7, 3-4-8
Hydraulic Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6
Replace element ................................................ 3-9-6 Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9
Filter service intervals Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-12
Tier 2/Stage II ........................................................ 3-1-8 Front loader
Tier 3/Stage III A .................................................. 3-1-10 Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5
Fires, prevent............................................................. 1-2-4 Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6
Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-6 Ground speeds .......................................................... 4-6-1
Fluid sample
Taking samples .................................................... 4-1-14 H
Front loader
Boom service lock Hand trottle .............................................................. 2-1-16
Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30 Handholds
Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5 Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1

Continued on next page

Index-3 020113

PN=3
Index

Page Page

Hardware torque values JDLink in-line fuse


Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30 Unswitched power.................................................. 4-1-9
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29 Job timer
Hazards Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11
Work Site ............................................................... 1-3-2
Heater controls ............................................2-1-13, 2-1-17 L
High-pressure oils
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-3 Lever
Hood, opening and closing ........................................ 3-2-5 Steering wheel tilt................................................. 2-1-20
Horn button..................................................2-1-12, 2-1-16 Levers and pedals ..................................................... 2-1-1
Hose Lifting ....................................................................... 2-2-25
Crankcase ventilation............................................. 3-8-6 Lifting capacities
Engine air intake .................................................... 3-8-1 310J
Radiator upper and lower....................................... 4-1-4 Extendible dipperstick ..............................4-6-8, 4-6-9
Hour meter................................................................. 3-2-1 Standard dipperstick........................................... 4-6-8
Hydraulic 310SJ
Backhoe auxiliary function Extendible dipperstick ...................................... 4-6-16
Flow control valve adjustment .......................... 2-2-18 Standard dipperstick......................................... 4-6-15
Backhoe auxiliary functions Lights ....................................................................... 2-1-14
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19 Loader
Backhoe auxiliary selective flow Boom service lock
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18 Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30
Oil Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5
Change............................................................. 3-10-1 Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15
Filter, replace element ........................................ 3-9-6 Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6
Oil filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3 Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23
Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11 Ride control
Reservoir Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18
Breather, replace ................................................ 3-9-2 Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19
Fill screen, inspect and clean ........................... 3-10-4 Loader backhoe
Oil level check .................................................... 3-4-1 Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21
Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-10 Loader coupler
Hydraulic oil ............................................................. 3-1-11 Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22
Hydraulic pressure Lowering boom
Pilot control system.............................................. 4-1-19 Without electrical power....................................... 4-1-20
Lubricants
I Alternative and synthetic lubricants ....................... 3-1-6
Lubricate
Indicator Axle
Engine air filter restriction ...................................... 2-1-3 MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8
Engine alternator voltage ....................................... 2-1-3 MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9
Engine oil pressure ................................................ 2-1-3 Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9
Hydraulic oil filter restriction ................................... 2-1-3 Axle, non-powered front
Park brake.............................................................. 2-1-3 Oscillating pivot and steering
Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12 pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10
Seat belt................................................................. 2-1-3 Backhoe
Stop........................................................................ 2-1-3 Pivots and cylinders .................................3-4-7, 3-4-8
Water in fuel (WIF)............................................... 2-1-14 Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6
Injection Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9
Nozzle .................................................................... 4-1-5 Front loader
Pump...................................................................... 4-1-5 Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5
Inspection, pre-start................................................... 2-2-1 Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6
Instrument Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-1
Check before starting............................................. 2-2-2
M
J
Machine
JDLink........................................................................ 4-1-9 Maintenance, preparation for ................................. 3-2-1

Continued on next page

Index-4 020113

PN=4
Index

Page Page

Warm-up
Cold weather ...................................................... 2-2-6 O
Normal conditions............................................... 2-2-5
Machine modifications Oil
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-2 Alternative and synthetic lubricants ....................... 3-1-6
Machine movement Axle sample ........................................................... 3-8-6
Unintended Change
Prevent .....................................................1-3-1, 1-3-2 Engine ................................................................ 3-8-3
Machine tipover Hydraulic reservoir ........................................... 3-10-1
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3 MFWD front axle housing................................. 3-10-2
Machine, inspect........................................................ 1-2-2 MFWD planetary housing................................. 3-10-2
Main menu Planetary housing............................................. 3-10-3
Standard display monitor ....................................... 2-1-8 Rear axle housing ............................................ 3-10-3
Maintenance Transmission ...................................................... 3-9-7
Chart ...................................................................... 3-2-1 Engine sample ....................................................... 3-7-4
Preparation for ....................................................... 3-2-1 Hydraulic sample ................................................... 3-8-6
Record ................................................................... 3-2-7 Level
Mechanical front wheel drive Engine ................................................................ 3-4-2
Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11 Hydraulic reservoir ............................................. 3-4-1
Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-30 MFWD housing................................................... 3-7-1
MFWD MFWD planetary housing................................... 3-7-1
Lubricate Transmission ...................................................... 3-5-1
Change axle housing oil ................................... 3-10-2 Level, rear axle ...................................................... 3-7-4
Change planetary housing oil........................... 3-10-2 Specification
Check axle housing oil level ............................... 3-7-1 Axles................................................................. 3-1-11
Check planetary housing oil level....................... 3-7-1 Hydraulic system .............................................. 3-1-11
Drive shaft splines .............................................. 3-3-8 Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11
Oscillating pivot and universal joints .................. 3-4-9 Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11
Operation ............................................................. 2-2-24 Transmission sample ............................................. 3-8-6
Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-12 Oil, engine
MFWD front axle housing Tier 2 and Stage II ................................................. 3-1-7
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2 Tier 3 and Stage III A ............................................. 3-1-9
Monitor Operating
Codes..................................................................... 2-1-9 Use special care .................................................... 1-3-4
Engine air filter restriction indicator........................ 2-1-3 Operating backhoe coupler ..................................... 2-2-21
Engine alternator voltage indicator ........................ 2-1-3 Operating loader coupler ......................................... 2-2-22
Engine coolant temperature gauge........................ 2-1-3 Operating tips
Engine oil pressure indicator.................................. 2-1-3 Lifting ................................................................... 2-2-25
Fuel level gauge..................................................... 2-1-3 Operation qualification............................................... 1-2-1
Hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator .................... 2-1-3 Operational checkout procedures.............................. 4-2-1
Job timer .............................................................. 2-1-11 Operator convenience features ................................. 1-1-1
machine settings .................................................. 2-1-11
Main menu ............................................................. 2-1-8 P
Normal display ....................................................... 2-1-7
Seat belt/park brake indicator ................................ 2-1-3 Park brake
Standard display .................................................... 2-1-2 Check operation of............................................... 4-1-20
Stop indicator ......................................................... 2-1-3 Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3
Transmission and torque converter oil Switch .................................................................. 2-1-12
temperature gauge............................................... 2-1-3 Park brake switch ............................................1-3-1, 1-3-2
Monitor functions ....................................................... 2-1-3 Parking
Monitor options ........................................................ 2-1-10 Machine ............................................................... 2-2-25
Motor service ........................................................... 4-1-27 Parts, moving
Stay clear ............................................................... 1-2-2
N Pattern select switch................................................ 2-1-15
Pedal
Normal display Sixth-function ....................................................... 2-2-19
Standard display monitor ....................................... 2-1-7 Pedals and levers ...................................................... 2-1-1
Pilot controls .......................................................... 2-1-1
Periodic maintenance chart ....................................... 3-2-1

Continued on next page

Index-5 020113

PN=5
Index

Page Page

Pilot control enable/disable switch........................... 2-1-15 Screen, hydraulic reservoir fill


Pilot control system Inspect and clean................................................. 3-10-4
Discharge hydraulic pressure .............................. 4-1-19 Seat
Pilot control wrist rest Air suspension
Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25 Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19
Pilot controls .............................................................. 2-1-1 Switch, height adjustment ................................ 2-1-13
Adjusting wrist rest............................................... 4-1-25 Mechanical suspension
Pins, metal Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19
Drive safely ............................................................ 1-4-2 Seat belt
Planetary housing Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3
Oil change............................................................ 3-10-3 Use and maintain ................................................... 1-3-1
Pre-start inspection.................................................... 2-2-1 Secondary and primary element
Pump Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-3
Service of pumps ................................................. 4-1-27 Secondary exits ....................................................... 2-1-18
Security system, anti-theft
R configuration .......................................................... 2-1-4
operation ................................................................ 2-1-6
Rear axle housing Serial number
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2 Engine.................................................................... 4-5-1
Receiver-dryer Machine ................................................................. 4-5-1
Check sight glasses ............................................... 4-1-3 MFWD front axle housing ...................................... 4-5-2
Recognize Rear axle housing .................................................. 4-5-2
Safety, information ................................................. 1-2-1 Transmission.......................................................... 4-5-1
Regulator precaution ................................................. 4-1-5 Service
Relays Control valves, cylinders, pumps, and motors ..... 4-1-27
Location ................................................................. 4-1-9 Ride control, discharge pressure ......................... 4-1-19
Required parts ........................................................... 3-2-9 Service brake
Ride control Inspection............................................................... 4-1-1
Checking accumulator ......................................... 4-1-18 Service interval checklist ........................................... 3-2-7
Discharge pressure for service ............................ 4-1-19 Service record ........................................................... 3-2-7
Operation ............................................................... 2-2-6 Settings
Switch and indicator............................................. 2-1-12 Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11
Riders Sixth-function pedal ................................................. 2-2-19
Keep off machine ................................................... 1-3-3 Specification
Right side console 310SJ................................................................... 4-6-10
Functions ............................................................. 2-1-12 Backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque......... 3-8-1
Roads Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-28
Operating or traveling ............................................ 1-3-4 Oil
ROPS Axle .................................................................. 3-1-11
Inspect ................................................................... 1-3-5 Hydraulic .......................................................... 3-1-11
Keep properly installed ........................................ 4-1-28 Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11
Maintain ................................................................. 1-3-5 Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11
Oil, differential ...................................................... 3-1-11
S Oil, hand-operated cab tilt hydraulic pump .......... 3-1-11
Oil, park brake...................................................... 3-1-11
Safety Wheel fastener torque............................................ 3-3-4
Clean debris from machine .................................... 1-2-6 Specifications
Operator's seat ...................................................... 1-3-1 310J .................................................. 4-6-2, 4-6-6, 4-6-9
Park and prepare for service safely ....................... 1-4-1 310SJ.......................................................4-6-15, 4-6-16
Protective equipment ............................................. 1-2-2 Speed ........................................................................ 4-6-1
Safety features .......................................................... 1-1-1 Stabilizers
Safety signs ............................................................... 1-5-1 Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-6
Backhoe coupler .................................................... 1-5-3 Operating ............................................................... 2-2-9
Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids Reversing feet...................................................... 4-1-16
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ................................... 1-2-3 Stage II
Safety, information Identification........................................................... 3-2-2
Recognize .............................................................. 1-2-1 Standard Display Function ........................................ 2-1-3
Sample test ports Standard display monitor...................2-1-2, 2-1-10, 2-1-11
Fluid sample......................................................... 4-1-14

Continued on next page

Index-6 020113

PN=6
Index

Page Page

Main menu Oil level .................................................................. 3-5-1


Settings ............................................................ 2-1-11 Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11
Settings ................................................................ 2-1-11 Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1
Standard display monitor (SDM) Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-12
Diagnostic trouble codes popup messages ........... 2-1-8 Transporting
Starting fluid, cold weather start ................................ 2-2-4 On a trailer ........................................................... 2-2-26
Starting system check ............................................. 4-1-14 Towing.................................................................. 2-2-27
Starting the engine .................................................... 2-2-3 Travel speeds ............................................................ 4-6-1
Steering Traveling
Toe-in, check and adjust ...................................... 4-1-26 On public roads...................................................... 1-3-4
Steering system......................................................... 4-3-9 Troubleshooting
Steps Electrical system .................................................... 4-3-5
Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1 Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1
Stop indicator............................................................. 2-1-3
Storage U
Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1
Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-1 Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ............... 4-1-29
Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2
Swing Lock Pin V
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-11
Switch Valve
Air suspension seat height adjustment ................ 2-1-13 Backhoe auxiliary hydraulic function flow control.. 2-2-18
Defroster, heater, and air condi- Hydraulic control valve service ............................ 4-1-27
tioner ......................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17 Vent tube, engine ...................................................... 3-8-6
Differential lock switch ......................................... 2-2-24
Locations, steering console ................................. 2-1-14
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD)................. 2-2-24 W
Park brake............................................................ 2-1-12
Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12 Warm-up
Turn signal ........................................................... 2-1-14 Machine, cold weather ........................................... 2-2-6
Warning lights ...................................................... 2-1-14 Machine, normal conditions ................................... 2-2-5
Work and drive lights ........................................... 2-1-14 Warranty statement
Switch functions....................................................... 2-1-12 Emissions control........................................................ -3
Water separator
Auxiliary, fuel filter ........................................3-3-6, 3-8-5
T Drain ............................................................3-3-6, 3-4-4
Weight
Teeth, backhoe bucket............................................. 4-1-27 Backhoe Loader
Tire 310J.................................................................... 4-6-7
Pressure................................................................. 3-3-2 310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14
Pressure check ...................................................... 3-3-1 Welding repairs
Toe-in Make safely............................................................ 1-4-2
Check and adjust ................................................. 4-1-26 Wheel bearings, front ................................................ 3-9-1
Toolbox Wheel fasteners......................................................... 3-3-4
Removal................................................................. 4-1-9 Windows
Torque charts Rear ..................................................................... 2-1-18
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30 Side, secondary exits........................................... 2-1-18
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29 Work site hazards
Torque converter Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-2
Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3 Wrist rest
Towing ..................................................................... 2-2-27 Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25
Transmissioin
Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3
Transmission
Oil change.............................................................. 3-9-7

Index-7 020113

PN=7
Index

Index-8 020113

PN=8